Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page i An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 0750661763-ch000-p...

Author: Alf Yarwood

233 downloads 587 Views 25MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page i

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page ii

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page iii

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Alf Yarwood

AMSTERDAM • BOSTON • HEIDELBERG • LONDON NEW YORK • OXFORD • PARIS • SAN DIEGO SAN FRANCISCO • SINGAPORE • SYDNEY • TOKYO Newnes is an imprint of Elsevier

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page iv

Newnes An imprint of Elsevier Linacre House, Jordan Hill, Oxford OX2 8DP 200 Wheeler Road, Burlington, MA 01803 First published 2004 Copyright © 2004, Alf Yarwood. All rights reserved The right of Alf Yarwood to be identified as the author of this work has been asserted in accordance with the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form (including photocopying or storing in any medium by electronic means and whether or not transiently or incidentally to some other use of this publication) without the written permission of the copyright holder except in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms of a licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London, England W1T 4LP. Applications for the copyright holder’s written permission to reproduce any part of this publication should be addressed to the publisher Permissions may be sought directly from Elsevier’s Science and Technology Rights Department in Oxford, UK. Phone: (44) (0) 1865 843830; fax: (44) (0) 1865 853333; e-mail: [email protected]. You may also complete your request on-line via the Elsevier homepage (http://www.elsevier.com), by selecting ‘Customer Support’ and then ‘Obtaining Permissions’

British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data Yarwood, A. An introduction to AutoCAD 2004 : 2D and 3D design 1. AutoCAD (Computer file) 2. Computer-aided design I. Title 620'.0042'02855369 Library of Congress Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the Library of Congress ISBN 0 7506 61763 For information on all Newnes publications visit our website at http://books.elsevier.com Typeset by Integra Software Services Pvt. Ltd, Pondicherry, India www.integra-india.com Printed and bound in Great Britain

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page v

Contents

Preface Acknowledgements

xiii xiv

1 Introduction Aims of this chapter The mouse as a digitiser Terms used throughout the book Opening AutoCAD 2004 Calling tools in AutoCAD 2004 The A3_template.dwt The AutoCAD coordinate system Examples of elementary drawings First example – with Line and Circle tools Second example – with Line and Ellipse tools Third example – with the Line tool Fourth example – with the Circle tool Fifth example – with the Arc tool Making use of the SNAP and ORTHO buttons The Active Assistance dialog Calling Help with the F1 key The Erase tool – example Undo and Redo tools Regen Saving drawings Revision tips Exercises

1 1 1 2 3 5 5 5 6 6 8 9 9 9 10 11 11 12 13 13 13 14 15

2 The Zoom tools Aims of this chapter The Zoom tools The variety of zooms The Aerial View window The Pan tool The wheel of a type of mouse Revision tips Exercises

17 17 17 18 21 22 22 23 23 v

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page vi

vi

Contents

3 Templates Aims of this chapter A template for use with this book Setting Limits Setting Units Setting Grid Setting Snap Setting Text Style Setting Dimension Style Setting Layers Saving the template Another template Revision tips

24 24 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 30 32 33 35

4 Accuracy when drawing Aims of this chapter The Circle and Arc tools First example – Circle – the Ttr response Second example – the Arc tool prompts Constructions using absolute coordinates First example Second example Constructions involving relative coordinate entry First example – relative coordinate entry Second example – relative coordinate entry Tracking Example – tracking Object Snaps Example – using osnap abbreviations AutoSnap Polar tracking An example of a drawing involving decimals Snap, Ortho and Grid Revision tips Exercises

36 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 41 41 41 43 44 45 45 46 47 47

5 More tools from the Draw toolbar Aims of this chapter The Polyline tool First example – Polyline – Width Second example – Polyline – Arc Third example – Polyline – Circle Fourth example – Polyline – Arrows Fifth example – Polyline – Fill The Construction Line tool Example – Construction Line The Polygon tool Examples – Polygons

51 51 51 51 52 53 53 54 55 56 57 58

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page vii

Contents

The Rectangle tool Examples – Rectangle tool The Ellipse tool Examples – Ellipse The set variable PELLIPSE The Revcloud tool Example – Revcloud The Spline tool The Point tool Revision tips Exercises

6 The Modify tools Aims of this chapter The Modify toolbar The Copy Object tool First example – Copy Object – single copy Second example – Copy Object – multiple copy The Mirror tool First example – Mirror The variable MIRRTEXT The Offset tool First example – Offset Other examples – Offset The Array tool First example – Rectangular array Second example – Polar array The Move tool The Rotate tool Examples – Rotate The Scale tool Examples – Scale The Stretch tool Examples – Stretch The Trim tool First example – Trim No extend Second example – Trim Extend The Extend tool Examples – Extend The Break tools Examples – Break The Chamfer tool Examples – Chamfer The Fillet tool Examples – Fillet Revision tips Exercises

vii

59 59 60 61 62 62 62 63 64 65 65

70 70 70 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 73 74 74 74 75 77 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 80 81 82 82 83 84 85 85 86 86 87 87

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page viii

viii

Contents

7 Dialogs, menus, text Aims of this chapter Dialogs The Options dialog Warning windows Menus Some sub-menus from drop-down menus Some right-click menus Text First example – Multiline Text Second example – Single line text Text fonts Checking spelling First example – the ddedit tool Second example – the Check Spelling tool The variable TEXTFILL Text symbols Revision tips Exercises

91 91 91 91 92 92 94 95 97 97 98 99 99 100 101 102 102 103 104

8 Layers and other features Aims of this chapter Layers Icons in the Layers popup list Limit to number of layers in a drawing The Options dialog Screen colours Lineweights The Polyline Edit tool Examples – Edit Polyline The Multiple option of Edit Polyline Express tools Grips Examples – Grips Revision tips

105 105 105 106 106 107 107 108 109 109 110 111 111 112 113

9 The DesignCenter and MDE Aims of this chapter The AutoCAD DesignCenter Dragging drawings from the DesignCenter Previews The Tree View Toggle icon The Multiple Document Environment (MDE) The Properties palette Revision tips Exercises

114 114 114 115 117 117 118 118 121 121

10 Types of technical drawings Aims of this chapter Orthographic projection

123 123 123

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page ix

Contents

Number of views in an orthographic projection Rules for orthographic projections Lines in technical drawings Examples of orthographic projections Isometric projection Isoplanes Examples of isometric drawings Revision tips Exercises

ix

124 126 126 127 127 128 130 133 134

11 Hatching Aims of this chapter The Hatch tool The parts of the Hatch Boundary and Fill dialog Other hatch palettes Other sub-dialogs Examples of hatching Hatching from the command line The hatching of sections in technical drawings Revision tips Exercises

138 138 138 138 138 138 139 146 146 147 148

12 Dimensioning Aims of this chapter The Dimension toolbar Examples of adding dimensions using the tools The meanings of the symbols Dimensioning from the command line Dimensions are associative Revision tips Exercises

151 151 151 151 158 160 162 163 163

13 Blocks and Inserts Aims of this chapter The Make Block tool Example – making a block The Insert Block tool Written blocks (wblocks) Example – constructing a written block Example – insertion of blocks The flyout from the Insert Block tool icon External references (Xrefs) Example – external references Inserting raster images Example – Image tool Attributes Example – Attributes Editing the attribute Revision tips Exercises

165 165 165 166 167 169 169 171 172 172 172 174 174 176 176 178 180 180

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page x

x Contents

14 Building drawing Aims of this chapter Types of building drawing First example – drawings for 63 Pheasant Drive Construction of floor layout drawings Hatching Exercises

183 183 183 183 183 184 185

15 Edit tools, DXF and EPS files Aims of this chapter Example of using the Edit tools First example – Copy Second example – Copy Link Third example – Paste Fourth example – Encapsulated Postscript file OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) DXF files Example – DXF file Revision tips Exercises

190 190 190 190 191 191 192 193 193 195 196 196

16 The Solids tools Aims of this chapter 3D Solid models 3D Views The UCS The Solids toolbar Examples of using the Solids tools The UCS The UCS icon Some examples of using the UCS Revision tips Exercises

198 198 198 198 199 200 200 206 207 208 211 211

17 More advanced 3D models Aims of this chapter The Extrude tool First example – Extrude Second example – Extrude Third example – Extrude Fourth example – Extrude The Revolve tool First example – Revolve Second example – Revolve Third example – Revolve The Slice tool Example – Slice The Section tool Example – Section

215 215 215 215 217 217 220 222 222 223 224 225 225 226 226

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page xi

Contents

The Setup Profile tool First example – Setup Profile Second example – Setup Profile Revision tips Exercises

xi

227 227 229 230 232

18 Viewports Aims of this chapter Viewports The variables UCSFOLLOW and UCSVP Example of constructions in viewports First example – Four: Equal setup Second example – Three: Left setup Third example – Four: Left Example – moving viewports Revision tips Exercises

237 237 237 238 239 239 240 242 242 243 244

19 Rendering Aims of this chapter Introduction Rendering options The Render tools Rendering lighting Rendering without adding lights Types of rendering lights Lighting icons Examples of rendering Revision tips Exercises An example of using Paper Space

247 247 247 247 248 248 248 249 251 251 257 257 260

20 3D surface models Aims of this chapter Introduction Examples of models using surface tools First example – 3D Face Second example – 3D Face Third example – Box Fourth example – Wedge Fifth example – Pyramid Sixth example – Cone Seventh example – Sphere Eighth example – Dome and Dish Ninth example – Torus Tenth example – Edge Surface Eleventh example – Revolved Surface Twelfth example – Tabulated Surface Thirteenth example – Ruled Surface

263 263 263 263 263 264 265 266 266 267 267 268 269 270 271 271 272

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page xii

xii

Contents

Revision notes Exercises Rendering surface models

273 273 277

21 More 3D solid models Aims of this chapter First example Second example Third example Fourth example Fifth example Exercises

278 278 278 281 283 287 289 291

22 Internet tools Aims of this chapter Emailing drawings Example – creating a web page Browsing the Web The eTransmit tool

296 296 296 296 299 300

23 Design and AutoCAD 2004 Ten reasons for using AutoCAD The place of AutoCAD 2004 in designing The design chart Enhancements in AutoCAD 2004 System requirements for running AutoCAD 2004

302 302 302 303 304 305

Appendix A Printing and plotting Introduction An example of a printout

306 306 307

Appendix B List of tools Introduction 2D tools 3D tools Internet tools

310 310 310 314 315

Appendix C Some set variables Introduction Some of the set variables

316 316 316

Appendix D Computing terms

318

Index

323

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page xiii

Preface

The purpose of writing this book is to produce a text suitable for those in Further and/or Higher Education who are required to learn how to use the computer aided design (CAD) software package AutoCAD® 2004. The book’s contents are also suitable for those in industry wishing to learn how to construct technical drawings with the aid of AutoCAD 2004 and those who, having used previous releases of AutoCAD, wish to update their skills in the use of AutoCAD. The chapters dealing with two-dimensional (2D) drawing will also be suitable for those wishing to learn how to use AutoCAD LT 2004, the 2D version of this latest release of AutoCAD. Many readers using AutoCAD 2002 will find this book’s contents largely suitable for use with that version of AutoCAD, although AutoCAD 2004 has many new enhancements over AutoCAD 2002 (see Chapter 23). The contents of the book are basically a carefully graded course of work, consisting of chapters giving explanations and examples of methods of constructions, followed by exercises to allow the reader to practise what has been learned in each chapter. The first set of chapters are concerned with constructing technical drawing in two dimensions (2D). These early chapters are followed by chapters detailing the construction of three-dimensional (3D) solid model drawings and rendering them. The two final chapters describe the Internet tools of AutoCAD 2004 and AutoCAD’s place in the design process. The book finishes with four appendices – printing and plotting, a list of tools with their abbreviations, a list of some of the set variables upon which AutoCAD 2004 is based, and a final appendix describing common computing terms. AutoCAD 2004 is a very complex CAD software package. A book of this size cannot possibly cover the complexities of all of the methods for constructing 2D and 3D drawings available when working with this CAD software. However, it is hoped that by the time the reader has worked through the contents of the book, he/she will be sufficiently skilled with the methods given for producing drawings using the software to be able to go on to more advanced constructions with its use and will have gained an interest in the more advanced possibilities available when using AutoCAD for the construction of 2D technical drawings and 3D solid model drawings and the sharing of those drawings via the Internet. Alf Yarwood Salisbury 2004 xiii

0750661763-ch000-prelims 1/12/04 6:04 PM Page xiv

Acknowledgements

Alf Yarwood wishes to acknowledge with grateful thanks the permissions granted by Simon Lake, Product Development Director of Pearson Education, to reproduce parts of the glossaries contained in this book from past publications of his books published by Pearson Education.

Registered Trademarks The following are registered in the US Patent and Trademark Office by Autodesk Inc.: Autodesk®, AutoCAD®. Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. Alf Yarwood is a member of the Autodesk Advanced Developer Network and a Master Developer with Autodesk Ltd.

xiv

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 1

CHAPTER 1

Introduction

Aims of this chapter The contents of this chapter are designed to introduce the following topics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

The mouse as a digitiser. The AutoCAD coordinate system. Opening AutoCAD 2004 and the AutoCAD 2004 window. Methods of calling tools. Using the Line, Circle, Arc, Erase, Undo, Redo and Regen tools. Toggling with the function keys. Help. The A3_template.dwt as the basis for drawings throughout the book. 9. Simple drawing methods based on the coordinate system. 10. The Active Assistance dialog and Help. 11. Saving drawings.

The mouse as a digitiser

Pick button

Return button

Wheel

Fig. 1.1 An optical mouse

Throughout this book the type of digitiser in use will be a two-button mouse. Other digitisers can be used with AutoCAD 2004 – pucks working with tablets for example. Fig. 1.1 shows one type – an optical mouse. The wheel of such a mouse is of value when working in AutoCAD 2004, in that zooming in or out can be effected by turning the wheel of the mouse. Holding and moving the wheel down allows panning of the screen (see page 22). The following terms are used in this book to describe actions which can be taken with a mouse: Left-click: Place the cursor under mouse control onto a feature and press the Pick button of the mouse. Right-click: Move the cursor under mouse control onto a feature and press the Return button of the mouse. Click: Has the same meaning as left-click. Double-click: Place the cursor under mouse control onto a feature and press the Pick button of the mouse twice in rapid succession. Drag: Move the cursor under mouse control, hold down the Pick button and move the mouse. The feature moves with the mouse movement. 1

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 2

2 An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Drag and drop: Drag a feature into a new position and release the mouse button when the feature is in the required new position. Pick: Move the cursor onto a feature and press the Pick button of the mouse. Note

The terms above are shown in italics throughout the book.

Terms used throughout the book Note

Terms shown in italics are shown in italics throughout the book. Cursor: Several types of cursor will be seen when using AutoCAD 2004 such as those shown in Fig. 1.2. Move the mouse, and the cursor in action moves as the mouse is moved.

Cursor arrow Pick box

Fig. 1.2 A few of the cursors seen in AutoCAD 2004

Cursors for re-sizing toolbars

Docked: A feature in a position right up against the edge of the screen or against another toolbar. Default: The name given to the settings or parameters of an application as set when the software is first purchased. Dialog: A window in which settings may be made (Fig. 1.3).

Fig. 1.3 A dialog

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 3

Introduction

Fig. 1.4 A drop-down menu

Fig. 1.5 A flyout

3

Drop-down menu: A menu which appears with a click on a name in the menu bar of AutoCAD 2004 (Fig. 1.4). Enter: Type the given word or letters at the keyboard. Entity: Has the same meaning in AutoCAD 2004 as has the word object. Esc: The Esc key of the keyboard. In AutoCAD 2004 pressing the Esc key has the effect of cancelling the current action taking place. Flyout: Some tool icons have a small arrow in the bottom right-hand corner of the icon. When the cursor is placed onto an icon with an arrow and the Pick button of the mouse is held down a flyout appears (Fig. 1.5). Icons: A feature in all Windows applications – a small item of graphics representing a tool or a function of the software in use (Fig. 1.6). Objects: Individual lines, circles, etc. as drawn in AutoCAD 2004. When objects are joined together as groups or as blocks, the whole group will be treated as an object. Pick box: An adjustable square at the intersection of the cursors and also associated with picking features of a construction (see Fig. 1.2). Return: Press the Return or Enter key of the keyboard. Usually, but not always, has the same result as a right-click – i.e. pressing the Pick button of the mouse. Select: Has the same meaning as pick. Tab key: The key usually on the left-hand side of the keyboard which carries two arrows. Tool: The name given to a command in recent releases of AutoCAD. Tool tip: The name of the tool represented by an icon, which appears when the cursor under mouse control is placed onto a tool icon (Fig. 1.6).

Opening AutoCAD 2004 There are two methods of loading AutoCAD 2004 from the Windows desktop icons: 1. Double-click on the AutoCAD 2004 shortcut icon (Fig. 1.7). 2. Right-click on the shortcut icon and from the menu which then appears, click on Open. Fig. 1.6 A tool icon and its tooltip

Fig. 1.7 The AutoCAD 2004 shortcut icon

The AutoCAD 2004 window opens (Fig. 1.8). Fig. 1.8 names the parts of the window. Normally six toolbars are included in the opening AutoCAD 2004 window unless the window is configured otherwise: Standard: Docked against the left side of the upper edge of the window. Styles: Docked against the right side of the upper edge of the window. Layers: Docked against the lower edge of the Standard toolbar. Properties: Docked against the lower edge of the Styles toolbar. Draw: Docked against the left-hand edge of the window. Modify: Docked against the Draw toolbar, but in some cases docked against the right-hand edge of the window.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 4

4 An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 1.8 The AutoCAD 2004 window

The window also includes: Title bar: Includes the name AutoCAD 2004 and the name of the drawing being constructed, provided it has been saved. A drawing name is not included in Fig. 1.8. Menu bar: A click on a name in the menu bar brings the drop-down menu associated with that name on screen. Close, Maximise and Minimise buttons: A click on the Close button closes the AutoCAD 2004 window. A click on the Minimise button closes the AutoCAD 2004 window, but it can be recalled from the AutoCAD 2004 icon bar in the Task bar at the bottom of the screen. A click on the Maximise button either enlarges or reduces the size of the window. Command window: Is a window in its own right and can be moved if required around the screen. Tool commands and prompt entries are made in the command window by typing at the computer’s keyboard. Status bar: Includes a number of buttons SNAP, GRID, etc. Coordinate figures in x,y,z numbers appear at the left-hand end of the bar. When a tool is called, its action is displayed in a sentence displacing the coordinate numbers. Model and Layout tabs: A click on one of these tabs takes the window into Model Space (the Model tab) or Paper Space (a Layout tab). When AutoCAD 2004 is opened its window will appear in Model Space format. UCS icon: Shows the directions of the X- and Y-axes. Cursor hairs: These show a pick box at the intersection of the cursor hairs. As the mouse moves, the pick box and the cursors move in sympathy with the mouse movement. Grid dots: If Grid is set on, a series of dots appear in the drawing area.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 5

Introduction

5

Calling tools in AutoCAD 2004 Constructions in AutoCAD 2004 are undertaken with the use of tools. These used to be called ‘commands’ in early versions of AutoCAD and the term ‘command’ may well be still in use with some operators. In this book the term ‘tool’ is used in preference to ‘command’. Tool icons are held in toolbars. Fig. 1.9 shows the tools in the Draw toolbar which is usually docked against the left-hand edge of the AutoCAD 2004 window. A click on a tool icon in a toolbar calls the tool into action. Tools can also be called from drop-down menus. The Draw tools can be called from the Draw drop-down menu (Fig. 1.10). Tools can be ‘called’ for use in four different ways. Most AutoCAD operators when they have acquired a reasonable degree of skill use a mixture of these four methods depending upon the action required at the moment. Thus to call the Line tool are four methods: 1. Click on the Line tool icon in the Draw toolbar. 2. Click on the name Line in the Draw drop-down menu. 3. At the command line in the command window enter line, followed by a right-click. 4. At the command line enter l (the abbreviation for Line), followed by a right-click. See Fig. 1.11. Fig. 1.9 The Draw toolbar showing all tool icons

Note

If a tool is called with a click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar, a statement appears in the status bar describing the action of the tool. This is shown for Line in Fig. 1.11. If line, or its abbreviation l is entered at the command line, this statement does NOT appear in the status bar.

The A3_template.dwt Drawings throughout this book have mostly been constructed in an AutoCAD template saved as A3_template.dwt. A description of the method of constructing this template is given in Chapter 3 (page 24). The files included with AutoCAD 2004 contain large number of different templates. These contain set parameters for the construction of a variety of different types of drawings.

The AutoCAD coordinate system The AutoCAD 2004 drawing area can be regarded as consisting of units, the number of which depend upon settings in the template in use at the time. Any point in the drawing area can be referred to by the number of units horizontally from an origin in terms of X and the number of units vertically from an origin in terms of Y. If the origin of the drawing area is taken as X 0 and Y 0, this is referred to as x,y 0,0. Similarly, any

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 6

6 An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

point on the screen can be described in terms of x,y giving the exact location of the point in the drawing area. The following rules apply: A comma (,) between the x and y to describe a coordinate point. .x,y 33,98 is 33 units horizontally to the right of the origin and 99 units vertically above the origin. .x,y 42,53 is 42 units horizontally to the left of the origin and 53 units vertically above the origin. .x,y 67,71 is 67 units horizontally to the right of the origin and 71 units vertically below the origin. A third coordinate Z is used when working in three dimensions (3D). It will be seen that the coordinate number shown at the left-hand end of the status bar shows three coordinates, the Z coordinate being the last of the three numbers which are shown in the form of x,y,z. When working in two dimensions (2D), the Z coordinate shows as 0 (Fig. 1.12). Fig. 1.13 shows some x,y coordinate points in the drawing area of the A3_template.dwt. The drawing area of this template is 420 units by 297 units. The size of an A3 sheet is 420 mm by 297 mm. Each coordinate unit in this template can be regarded as being 1 mm in length.

Examples of elementary drawings First example – with Line and Circle tools (Fig. 1.19)

1. Move the mouse until the cursor is placed over the left-hand end of the status bar. After a slight hesitation, a description of what is at that position appears (Fig. 1.14). Fig. 1.10 The tools in the Draw drop-down menu

Fig. 1.11 Calling Line by entering I

Fig. 1.12 The coordinate numbers in the status bar

2. Press the keyboard key F6. The coordinate numbers in the status bar either show or grey-out. Make sure the coordinate numbers are shown (Fig. 1.15). 3. Left-click on the SNAP button in the status bar (Fig. 1.16). If this pushes the SNAP button ‘in’, snap is set on, and as the cursor moves it snaps between snap points. Make sure snap is on (Fig. 1.16).

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 7

Introduction 330,295

7

420,290

220,265

10,260 60,220

285,220

170,215

405,190

255,170

25,165

345,150

130,145 335,105

35,100

325,75

110,75

230,30

Fig. 1.13 x,y coordinate points in the AutoCAD 2004 drawing area

420,25 0,0

Fig. 1.14 The description of what is in the left-hand end of the status bar

Fig. 1.15 The coordinate numbers showing clearly in the status bar

Fig. 1.16 Left-click on the SNAP button

Fig. 1.17 The Line tool icon in the Draw toolbar

4. Call the Line tool with a left-click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 1.17). 5. Move the cursor by moving the mouse until the coordinate numbers show 0,270, and left-click (Fig. 1.19). 6. Move the cursor until the coordinate numbers show 195,270, and leftclick. 7. Continue in this manner following the coordinates shown in Fig. 1.19. When back to 0,270, right-click. A rectangle forms. 8. Left-click on the Circle tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 1.18). 9. Move the cursor until 30,240 shows in the status bar, and left-click.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 8

8 An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 0,270

195,270

30,240

165,240

30,190

165,190

Fig. 1.18 The Circle tool icon from the Draw toolbar Fig. 1.19 First example – Line and Circle tools

0,160

195,160

10. Move the cursor 10 units to the right – until the coordinates show 40,240, and left-click. A circle forms. Repeat for the other three circles as shown in Fig. 1.19. Second example – with Line and Ellipse tools (Fig. 1.21)

Fig. 1.20 The Ellipse tool icon in the Draw toolbar

1. Using the same method as for the first example, construct the outline given in Fig. 1.21 using the Line tool. 2. Call the Ellipse tool with a left-click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 1.20). 3. Move the cursor under mouse control until the coordinates show 80,130, and left-click. 4. Move the cursor until the coordinates show 280,130, and left-click. 5. Move the cursor until the coordinates show 180,185, and right-click. An ellipse forms. Fig. 1.21 shows the resulting drawing.

Start here 80,210 80,180

280,210 280,180 310,180

180,185

50,180

80,130

50,80 80,80

Fig. 1.21 Second example – Line and Ellipse tools

80,50

280,130

310,80 280,80 280,50

Note

In the two examples given above, the third number in the coordinates showing in the status bar should be ignored.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 9

Introduction

9

Third example – with the Line tool (Fig. 1.22)

Call the Line tool with a click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 1.17), or by entering line or l at the command line. The command line shows: Command:_line Specify first point: enter 60,230 right-click Specify next point or [Undo]: enter 250,230 right-click Specify next point or [Undo]: enter 250,110 right-click Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: enter 60,110 right-click Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: enter c (for Close) right-click Command: and the rectangle given in Fig. 1.22 is drawn. 60,230

250,230

c (Close)

Fig. 1.22 Third example – with the Line tool

60,110

250,110

Fourth example – with the Circle tool (Fig. 1.23) 0 R8

190,160

Call the Circle tool with a click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 1.18) or by entering circle or c at the command line. The command line shows: Command:_circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttrr (tan,tan,radius)]: enter 190,160 right-click Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: enter 80 right-click Command: and the circle given in Fig. 1.23 is drawn.

Fig. 1.23 Fourth example – with the Circle tool

Fifth example – with the Arc tool (Fig. 1.25)

Call the Arc tool with a click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 1.24), or by entering arc or a at the command line. The command line shows:

Fig. 1.24 The Arc tool icon from the Draw toolbar

Command:_arc Specify start point of arc or [Center]: enter 30,220 right-click Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: enter 80,250 right-click Specify end point of arc: enter 140,220 right-click Command: right-click (brings the arc sequence back) ARC Command:_arc Specify start point of arc or [Center]: enter 310,220 right-click

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 10

10

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: enter c (for Center) right-click Specify center point of arc: enter 250,160 right-click Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: enter 190,220 right-click Command: and the two arcs given in Fig. 1.25 are drawn.

80,250

Fig. 1.25 Examples – with the Arc tool

30,220

140,220 190,220

310,220

250,160

Notes

1. Apart from clicking the appropriate tool icon, entering the tool name or an abbreviation for the tool name, tools from the Draw toolbar can be selected from the Draw drop-down menu (Fig. 1.26). 2. When a tool is called, a sequence of ‘prompts’ appear at the command line. In these prompt sequences, where a prompt starts with a capital letter, entering the capital letter followed by a right-click brings another prompt line associated with that prompt. See the example in the Arc example where a c (for Center) brought up a prompt line asking for the center of the arc. 3. In the remainder of this book when showing prompt sequences and the responses, the terms enter and right-click will not always be used in order to save page space. 4. As well as leaving out these two terms, long sequences of prompts once they have been given and have to be repeated, will be replaced by: [prompts].

Making use of the SNAP and ORTHO buttons

Fig. 1.26 Draw tools can be selected from the Draw drop-down menu

Fig. 1.27 The buttons in the status bar

Frequent use of some of the buttons in the status bar (Fig. 1.27) is advisable to speed up some operations when using AutoCAD 2004. The buttons can be toggled on/off with left-clicks. When a button appears as if pushed in, the relative action is on. When the SNAP button is set on, movements of the mouse can only occur between the snap points as set in

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 11

Introduction

11

the template in use. It is sometimes advisable to have SNAP set on and sometimes for it to be set off. The same applies to the ORTHO which when on, allows tools to be used only in strictly vertical or horizontal directions. As skill in the use of AutoCAD increases, so will the other buttons be used as occasion demands. These actions can also be toggled on/off by pressing function keys: F9: F8: F7: F3: F10:

toggles SNAP. toggles ORTHO. toggles GRID. toggles OSNAP. toggles POLAR.

The choice of using the status bar buttons or the function keys will probably vary depending upon the practices the operator develops as his/her skills progress.

The Active Assistance dialog

Fig. 1.28 Opening the Active Assistance dialog from the Help drop-down menu

Left-click on Help in the menu bar. The Help drop-down menu appears (Fig. 1.28). Click on Active Assistance in the menu. Once the dialog is activated by this selection, when a tool is called, an Active Assistance dialog for that tool appears. Fig. 1.29 shows the Active Assistance dialog for the Arc tool.

Fig. 1.29 The Active Assistance dialog for the Arc tool

Calling Help with the F1 key Another method for calling help is by pressing the function key F1. When a tool has been called, if there is some indecision as to how the tool can be used, pressing F1 brings up a Help dialog for that tool. Fig. 1.30

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 12

12

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 1.30 The Help dialog appearing when F1 is pressed for the Line tool

shows such a dialog brought to screen by pressing F1 when the Line tool is in use. As skill builds in operating AutoCAD 2004, it will probably not be necessary to use either the Active Assistance dialog or to press F1.

The Erase tool – example (Fig. 1.32) Fig. 1.31 The Erase tool icon in the Modify toolbar

If an error is made when constructing a drawing, the Erase tool can be used to delete objects in a drawing. To call the Erase tool, either left-click its tool icon at the top of the Modify toolbar (Fig. 1.31) or enter e at the command line. By far the quickest method is to enter e at the command line. The command line shows: Command: e Select objects: pick one of the lines 1 found Select objects: pick the second line 1 found 2 total Select objects: right-click Command: see Fig. 1.32.

Select objects

Result

Fig. 1.32 The Erase tool – example

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 13

Introduction

13

Instead of picking, individual objects to be erased can be windowed. If the window is from top left to bottom right of the objects to be erased, only those objects within the window are deleted. If, however, the window is from bottom right to top left, all objects crossed by the window are deleted. A bottom right to top left window is a crossing window.

Undo and Redo tools Fig. 1.33 The Undo and Redo icons in the Standard toolbar

The Undo and Redo tool icons are in the Standard toolbar which is docked against the menu bar. Fig. 1.33 shows the Undo icon. The Redo tool icon is to the right of the Undo button. A click on the Undo button undoes the last object added to a drawing. Repeated clicks on the button will eventually lead to all objects added during the current session to be undone. The same applies to the Redo button which brings back on screen those objects removed by using Redo. It is far easier to just enter u at the command line for Undo rather than click the icon.

Regen It is occasionally necessary to regenerate the drawing on screen. This will sometimes be when the Zoom tool has been used (see page 17). Regeneration redraws the screen and if a number of arcs or circles are in a drawing forms these into more exact shapes. To make regeneration effective just enter re at the command line.

Saving drawings The purpose of including a series of worked examples in the chapters of this book is to help readers build up an expertise in using AutoCAD 2004. With this in mind, it is advisable to work through the worked examples and also any exercises which end most chapters. The resulting drawings should be saved to a floppy disk, usually in the A: drive of a computer. To save a drawing which has been constructed in AutoCAD 2004:

Fig. 1.34 Selecting Save As . . . from the File drop-down menu

1. Left-click File in the menu bar and in the drop-down menu which appears left-click Save As . . . (Fig. 1.34). The Save Drawing As dialog appears (Fig. 1.35). 2. Place a formatted floppy disk in the A: drive. Then, in the Save in field of the dialog list select 31/2 Floppy (A:). 3. In the File name field enter a suitable file name – in Fig. 1.35 this is Worked example 01. 4. Click the Save button of the dialog. The drawing will be saved to a file name Worked example 01.dwg. The file name extension .dwg is added automatically.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 14

14

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 1.35 The Save Drawing As dialog

Revision tips 1. Make sure the terms used throughout this book are understood. 2. AutoCAD 2004 can be opened either with a double-click on the AutoCAD 2004 shortcut icon on the Windows desktop or with a rightclick on the icon which brings up a menu – a click on Open in that menu opens AutoCAD 2004. 3. There is another method of opening AutoCAD 2004 not given in this chapter. A click on the Start button in the Windows task bar, followed by another click on All Programs in the menu which appears, followed by a click on AutoCAD 2004 in that menu. This brings up a sub-menu from which AutoCAD can be opened. 4. Tools can be called using any one of four methods – a click on the tool’s tool icon in the appropriate toolbar, a click on the tool name in the appropriate drop-down menu, entering the tool name at the command line or entering an abbreviation for the tool name at the command line. 5. When a tool is called with a click on its tool icon, a statement appears in the status bar stating the action of the tool. 6. Any point in the AutoCAD 2004 drawing area can be referred to as a coordinate point in terms of x,y number. 7. Make full use of the buttons in the status bar, particularly the SNAP and ORTHO buttons. 8. The Active Assistance dialog can be called to screen to give help when any tool is called for use.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 15

Introduction

15

9. Pressing the F1 key when a tool is called, brings a Help dialog for that tool to screen. 10. Use Erase to delete errors made when drawing. Undo and Redo can also be used to immediately remove wrong objects or call them back to screen as needed. 11. Save drawings made in answer to both the worked examples and the exercises in chapters in this book. Use a floppy disk for this, unless you are the only person using the computer.

Exercises 1. Using the Line and Circle tools, construct the drawing given in Fig. 1.36. When completed, save to a file name such as ex01.dwg.

80,240

310,240

190,160

110,210

280,210

R5

0

110,110

280,110 R15 310,80

80,80

Fig. 1.36 Exercise 1

2. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 1.37 using the Line and Circle tools. The x,y coordinate positions of the centres of the circles will require to be calculated before the circles can be drawn.

20 110,240 20

290,240 320,210

80,210

All circles are of radius 10

80,100

Fig. 1.37 Exercise 2

110,70

320,100 290,70

3. Using the Line and Arc tools construct the drawing given in Fig. 1.38.

0750661763-ch001 1/12/04 4:50 PM Page 16

16

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 155,250 60,220

100,210

210,210

250,220

155,200 155,160 100,150

60,140

210,150

245,140

155,110

Fig. 1.38 Exercise 3

4. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 1.39 using the Line, Arc and Circle tools. R45 R35

185,180

110,180

260,180

135,125

235,125

R40 260,95

Fig. 1.39 Exercise 4

110,50

135,65

235,65

260,50

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 17

CHAPTER 2

The Zoom tools

Aims of this chapter The contents of this chapter are designed to introduce the use and importance of the following: 1. The Zoom tools. 2. The Pan tool. 3. The Aerial View window.

The Zoom tools The Zoom tools are among the most frequently used tools when constructing drawings in AutoCAD 2004. These tools allow the smallest area of a drawing to be examined, modified or added to with great accuracy as and when required. There are several methods of calling the Zoom tools: 1. By entering z (for Zoom) at the command line, which then shows: Command: enter z right-click ZOOM Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP) or [All/ Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window] real time: pick a corner for a real time window Specify opposite corner: pick Command: 2. Toolbars not already in the AutoCAD 2004 window can be brought to the screen with a right-click in any toolbar already on screen, when a menu listing all toolbars appears (Fig. 2.1). A click on Zoom in this list brings the Zoom toolbar to screen. Tools can be selected from the toolbar (Fig. 2.2). 3. With a click on the appropriate Zoom tool icon in the Standard toolbar (docked just beneath the menu bar) – Fig. 2.3.

Fig. 2.1 Bringing the Zoom toolbar on screen

The person operating AutoCAD may decide to use a mixture of these three methods. By far, the quickest method of using Zoom is to enter z at the command line. For the purpose of describing the actions of the Zoom tools an example – the building plan drawing given in Fig. 2.4 – will be used. This drawing has been constructed in an A2 size template. 17

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 18

18

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

BATH & WC

Landing BEDROOM 2

Fig. 2.2 The Zoom toolbar

Bath

BEDROOM 3

BEDROOM 1

UPPER FLOOR

CLOAKS STUDY

Fig. 2.3 The Zoom tool icons in the Standard toolbar

HALL

KITCHEN

DINING ROOM

LOUNGE

Fig. 2.4 The building plan used as an example for describing the Zoom tools

UTILITY

LOWER FLOOR

The variety of zooms

From the zoom command line, sequence of prompts when Zoom is called by entering z at the command line: All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window Real time: When Zoom is called by entering z the first prompt asks for a corner of a zoom window. When picked the window’s opposite corner must be picked and the screen shows the area within the window filling the whole of the drawing area. Fig. 2.5 shows the zoom window picked in the drawing, and Fig. 2.6 the resulting zoomed drawing. All: The drawing area reverts to the limits set in the template being used (see page 24). Center: Asks for a centre point to be specified. When picked, the drawing centres around the specified point. Dynamic: A rectangle appears in the AutoCAD drawing area, the size, but not the proportions of which can be changed. A cross appears in the centre of the rectangle. Left-click and the cross changes to an arrow against the right-hand edge of the rectangle. With the arrow in position, dragging alters the size and position of the rectangle. When its size and position are as wished, a right-click zooms the area within the rectangle. Fig. 2.7 shows the drawing on screen with the Dynamic rectangle and Fig. 2.8 the arrow against the right-hand edge of the rectangle. Fig. 2.9 shows the resulting dynamic zoomed window.

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 19

The Zoom tools

19

Fig. 2.5 Picking a real time window

Extents: The drawing fills the AutoCAD drawing area. Previous: No matter which zoom is called, the Previous prompt causes the previous zoom to appear. Scale: Entering a figure greater than, or smaller than 1 in digits or decimal form enlarges or reduces the drawing to the given scale figure. Window: Has the same effect as real time.

Fig. 2.6 The result of the real time window of Fig. 2.5

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 20

20

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 2.7 The Dynamic zoom rectangle on screen

Fig. 2.8 The arrow against the right-hand edge of the dynamic rectangle

Fig. 2.9 The result of the dynamic zoom shown in Fig. 2.7

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 21

The Zoom tools

21

The Aerial View window Click View in the menu bar and in the drop-down menu which appears, click on Aerial View. The Aerial View window appears (Fig. 2.10).

Fig. 2.10 The Aerial View window

The window shows all of the drawing on screen and when a zoom is called, the area within a zoom is shown in the Aerial View window surrounded by a thick black line. Fig. 2.11 shows a zoomed window of the building drawing in Fig. 2.4 within the Aerial View window.

Fig. 2.11 A zoom window within the Aerial View window

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 22

22

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

The Pan tool The Pan tool can be called either by entering p at the command line or by clicking on its tool icon in the Standards toolbar. When the tool is called the command line shows: Command:_pan Press ESC or ENTER to exit or right-click to display shortcut menu and an icon of a hand appears in the drawing area of the window. Dragging the mouse moves the drawing across the screen, the area covered being enclosed in a black rectangle in the Aerial window. The Pan tool is of particular use when constructing large drawings because it allows parts of the drawing which cannot be seen to be dragged into the drawing area. Fig. 2.12 shows the right-click menu which appears with a right-click and the Aerial View window when the building drawing given in Fig. 2.4 is panned to allow part of what is a large drawing to be seen in the drawing area.

Fig. 2.12 The Pan shortcut menu and the Aerial View window during panning

The wheel of a type of mouse Some types of mouse have a wheel, clearly seen in the example shown in Fig. 1.1 on page 1. The wheel can be used to zoom in, zoom out or pan a drawing when working with such a mouse in AutoCAD 2004. Rotating the wheel forward enlarges the drawing on screen – a Zoom In, while rotating the wheel backwards reduces the drawing in size – a Zoom Out. Pressing the wheel allows panning.

0750661763-ch002 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 23

The Zoom tools

23

Revision tips 1. Make full use of zooms as and when necessary to achieve accuracy in constructions. 2. Toolbars can be brought to screen from the list appearing with a rightclick in any toolbar on screen. 3. The Zoom tool can be called from the Zoom toolbar, from icons in the Standard toolbar or by entering z at the command line. 4. The quickest method of calling zooms is to enter z at the command line. 5. Use the Aerial View window to see the whole drawing when zooms or pans are in action. 6. The Pan tool allows parts of large drawings to be clearly seen. 7. Use the wheel of some types of mouse for zooming in or out and for panning.

Exercises If you have saved the answers to the exercises from Chapter 1, open them and practise a variety of zooms and pans with the drawings on screen.

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 24

CHAPTER 3

Templates

Aims of this chapter This chapter is designed to introduce: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Templates. The template used for most of the drawings in this book. Other forms of template. A template such as used in industry. Saving and opening templates. Model Space (Mspace) and Paper Space (Pspace).

A template for use with this book Most of the drawings in this book have been drawn as if constructed on an A3 sheet of paper – i.e. of dimensions 420 mm by 297 mm. To make this possible the following settings have been made for a template for use when making these drawings: Limits – set to an origin of x,y 0,0 and limit of x,y 420,300. Thus when a drawing is printed full size (scale 1:1) each coordinate unit is equivalent to 1mm. Units – set with no figures after the decimal point. Grid – set to 10 units. Snap – set to 5 units. Text Style – set to Arial of height 6. Dimensions Style – set to an ISO style. Layers – 5 layers – 0, Hidden, Centre, Text and Dimensions with appropriate line styles. This template will be saved to the name A3_template. Templates have a file name extension *.dwt distinguishing them from a drawing file which has an extension *.dwg. Setting Limits

Fig. 3.1 The Format drop-down menu 24

Click on Format in the menu bar and from the drop-down menu which appears (Fig. 3.1), it will be seen that settings can be started from this menu. Either left-click on Drawing Limits in this menu or enter limits at the command line, which then shows:

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 25

Templates

25

Command:_limits Reset Model space limits: Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF]: 0.0000,0000: right-click Specify upper right corner 12.0000,9.0000: 420,300 Command: To make sure the limits are applied: Command: enter z (Zoom) [prompts]: enter a (All) right-click Command: Setting Units

Note that before setting Units the status bar will show x,y coordinates to four decimal places – e.g. 45.0000,245.0000,0.0000. These will change to 45,245,0 when units have been set for this template. 1. Left-click Units . . . in the Format drop-down menu. The Drawing Units dialog (Fig. 3.2) appears. 2. In the Precision popup list click on 0, followed by a click on the OK button.

Fig. 3.2 The Units dialog

Setting Grid

At the command line: Command: enter grid right-click Specify grid spacing (X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] 1: 10 Command:

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 26

26

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Setting Snap

At the command line: Command: enter snap right-click Specify snap spacing or [ON/OFF/Aspect/Rotate/Style/Type] 1: 5 Command: Setting Text Style

1. Click on Text Style . . . in the Format drop-down menu and the Text Style dialog appears (Fig. 3.3). 2. In the Font name popup list click Arial. 3. Click the New . . . button. The New Text Style dialog appears. Enter Arial in its Style name field (Fig. 3.4) and click its OK button. The name Arial appears in the Style name field.

Fig. 3.3 The Text Style dialog

Fig. 3.4 The New Text Style dialog

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 27

Templates

27

4. Enter 6 in the Height field of the Text Style dialog, followed by leftclicks on the Apply and Close buttons. 5. The text style is now set. Setting Dimension Style

1. Click on Dimension Style . . . in the Format drop-down menu. 2. In the Dimension Style Manager which appears, click the Modify . . . button (Fig. 3.5).

Fig. 3.5 The Dimension Style Manager dialog

3. The Modify Dimension Style dialog appears. Note there are six tabs in the upper part of the dialog. Click the Lines and Arrows tab, and in the changed dialog (Fig. 3.6) make entries as follows: Extend beyond dim line field – enter 3. Offset from origin field – enter 3. Arrow size field – enter 6. Center Mark for Circles popup list – select None. 4. Click the Text tab and in the Text dialog (Fig. 3.7) make entries as follows: Text Style – select Arial from the popup list. Text height – enter 6. Text Placement – select Above from the popup list. Horizontal – select Centered from the popup list. Offset from dim line field – enter 2. Text Alignment – click the ISO radio button. 5. Click the Primary Units tab and in the Primary Units dialog (Fig. 3.8) make changes as follows: Precision – in the popup list click on 0. Left-click the OK button.

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 28

28

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 3.6 The Lines and Arrows dialog

Fig. 3.7 The Text dialog

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 29

Templates

29

Fig. 3.8 The Primary Units dialog

6. In the Dimension Style manager dialog which now reappears, check that the dimension style as shown in the preview box is as wished. If satisfied: Click the New . . . button, and in the Create New Dimensions Style dialog make entries as shown in Fig. 3.9.

Fig. 3.9 The Create New Dimension Style dialog

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 30

30

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Left-click the Continue button. One of the dialogs of the Dimension Style Manager reappears. Left-click its OK button. The Dimension Style Manager reappears. Left-click on the name A3_template in the Styles list. Left-click the Set Current button. Left-click the Close button. Dimension style has now been set. Setting Layers

Drag the Layers toolbar away from its docked position under the Standard toolbar. Fig. 3.10 shows its parts. To set layers:

Fig. 3.10 The parts of the Layers toolbar

1. Left-click the Layer Properties Manager icon in the Layers toolbar. The Layer Properties Manager appears (Fig. 3.11). In the dialog, left-click the New . . . button four times. Four new layer names appear in the Name list as shown in Fig. 3.11. 2. Click the Layer1 name. Then double-click the name again. The name highlights. Enter Centre to replace Layer1. 3. Repeat for each of the other layers in turn to give the name Dimensions, Hidden and Text. Layer 0 – (default) cannot be changed. 4. Left-click on the word Continuous in the Centre layer line. The Select Linetype dialog appears. Left-click on its Load . . . button. The Load or Reload Linetypes dialog appears. In the Linetype list double-click the name CENTER2. This name replaces Continuous in the Centre layer line (Fig. 3.12). 5. Repeat item 4 to replace Continuous with HIDDEN2 for the linetype in the Hidden layer line. 6. Click on the black square against the layer Centre. The Select Color dialog appears (Fig. 3.13). In the dialog double-click the red square. The black square in the Centre layer line changes to a red square. 7. Repeat item 6 to make the colour for the Dimension layer Magenta, the Hidden layer Blue and the Text layer Green. 8. Left-click the OK button of the Layer Properties Manager.

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 31

Templates

Fig. 3.11 The Layer Properties Manager

Fig. 3.12 Setting linetypes in the layers

31

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 32

32

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 3.13 The Select Color dialog

To see the result of these additions to layers click the arrow to the right of the layers field in the Layers toolbar. The five layers are listed in the popup list with the layer names together with the linetypes and colours which have been allocated to the layers (Fig. 3.14).

Fig. 3.14 The layers popup list

Note the icons in this popup list. Clicks on these will turn a layer on or off, freeze a layer or lock a layer. When a layer is turned off details on that layer do not appear in a drawing. When a layer is locked objects on that layer cannot be modified – e.g. deleted, but details can be added to a locked layer. A click on any of these icons shows a tooltip describing the action of the icon.

Saving the template Templates must be saved with a filename extension *.dwt to distinguish them for drawing files with an extension *.dwg. To save the template: 1. Left-click File in the menu bar, and in the drop-down menu click Save As . . . . The Save Drawing As dialog appears (Fig. 3.15).

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 33

Templates

33

Fig. 3.15 Saving the template

2. In the Files of type popup list click AutoCAD Drawing Template (*.dwt). The AutoCAD 2004 Template directory name appears in the Save in field. 3. In the File name field enter A3_template. The name appears in the File list. 4. Click the dialog’s Save button and the file is saved. To reload the template click New . . . in the File drop-down menu. The contents of the Template directory appear in the Select Template dialog which appears on screen. The A3_template.dwt template can be opened from this dialog.

Another template Another template which may be considered worth saving is one similar to that shown in Fig. 3.16. Such a template includes a title block and borders. It may be of any coordinate limits in size – e.g. for an A2 sheet (597 mm by 420 mm) or an A1 sheet (820 mm by 597 mm). A large number of different templates are available from the AutoCAD 2004 template directory. These can be seen in the Preview box of the Select template dialog (Fig. 3.17). Many of these templates are in Paper Space, which provides a 2D drawing area. If one of the Paper Space templates from the Select template is opened, it will be seen that there are only x,y coordinates shown in the status bar.

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 34

34

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Fig. 3.16 Another type of template

B

AutoCAD 2004 1

2

Drawn by:

Dimensions in mm

Date drawn:

Tolerances ±0.05 unless shown

3

4

5

6

Title of drawing A

A

B

C

C

D

D

E

E

F

F

1

7

8

Fig. 3.17 An example of a template preview in the Select template dialog

Note on Model Space

The majority of drawings in this book are constructed in Model Space (Mspace). In AutoCAD 2004 drawings can be printed or plotted from either Model Space or Paper Space. More about this will be discussed later in this book. Switching from Model Space to Paper Space and vice versa can be effected by clicks on the Model or Layout tabs just below the drawing area.

0750661763-ch003 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 35

Templates

35

Revision tips 1. The template for use with this book requires the following settings: Limits, Units, Grid, Snap, Text Style, Dimension Style and Layers. 2. This template has been saved to the name A3_template.dwt. 3. To open a template click New . . . in the File drop-down menu and select from the Select template dialog which appears. 4. Drawings in this book are usually constructed in Model Space. Paper Space will be used in later chapters.

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 36

CHAPTER 4

Accuracy when drawing

Aims of this chapter The contents of this chapter are designed to introduce the following when constructing drawings: 1. Further worked examples involving the Circle and Arc tools. 2. Further examples of constructing drawings to absolute coordinate entry. 3. Worked examples involving the use of constructions involving absolute coordinate entry. 4. Worked examples of using the tracking methods of determining accurate lengths when constructing drawings. 5. Using Object Snaps. 6. Using AutoSnap. 7. Using Polar tracking. 8. The importance of using Snap and Ortho. Note

All the worked examples in this chapter and the exercises at the end of the chapter should be worked on an A3_template brought to screen by selecting New . . . from the File drop-down menu.

The Circle and Arc tools A simple example of using these two tools was given in Chapter 1. The worked examples given below show further methods of using them. When the Circle tool is called the prompt appears: Command:_circle Specify center of circle or [3P/2P/Ttr]: If the response is 3P, a circle can be drawn through three points either picked on screen or entered as coordinate points. Similarly a circle can be drawn through two points. First example – Circle – the Ttr response

1. With the A3_template on screen, construct the two circles given in Fig. 4.1. 2. Call Circle again. The command line shows: 36

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 37

Accuracy when drawing

37

R50 R30

110,190

Fig. 4.1 First example – Circle – the Ttr response – the two circles

R30 245,190

135

Command:_circle Specify center of circle or [3P/2P/Ttr]: enter t (tan, tan., Radius) right-click Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: pick Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: pick Specify radius of circle: 55 Command: The result is shown in Fig. 4.2.

Fig. 4.2 First example – Circle – the Ttr response

When a tangent point is picked, a Deferred Tangent icon and tooltip is shown at the picked point (Fig. 4.3). Second example – the Arc tool prompts

The number of different methods of using the Arc tool for drawing arcs can be seen by selecting Arc from the Draw drop-down menu (Fig. 4.4). The Arc sub-menu shows the choices available. Fig. 4.5 gives some examples.

Constructions using absolute coordinates Deferred Tangent

Fig. 4.3 The Deferred Tangent icon

Some simple examples of constructions drawn by entering points on an outline as x,y coordinates have been given in Chapter 1. Two further examples are given here.

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 38

38

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

First example (Fig. 4.6)

Call the line tool. The command line shows: Command:_line Specify first point: 50,250 Specify next point or [Undo]: 100,250 Specify next point or [Undo]: 100,250 Specify next point or [Undo]: 150,200 and continue in this way until the outline given in Fig. 4.6 is completed.

3 points

Fig. 4.4 The Arc sub-menu from the Draw drop-down menu

Start, Center, Length

Start, Center, End Continue

45°

Fig. 4.5 Second example – the Arc prompts

Start, End, Angle

50,250

Center, Start, End

100,250

250,200 150,200 280,270 150,140 250,140

Fig. 4.6 First example – absolute coordinates

50,90

100,90

Second example (Fig. 4.7)

Call the Line tool. The command line shows: Command:_line Specify first point: 100,200 Specify next point or [Undo]: 210,220 Continue until all straight lines have been drawn. Then:

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 39

Accuracy when drawing

39

Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 110,120 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: right-click Command: enter a (Arc) right-click Specify start point of arc or [Center]: 100,200 Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: 50,170 Specify end point of arc: 100,200 Command: Continue in this way to construct the inner outline of Fig. 4.7.

100,220 100,200 50,170

210,220 200,200

70,170

100,140

Fig. 4.7 Second example – absolute coordinates

100,120

250,180 230,170

150,160

200,140 210,120

Constructions involving relative coordinate entry 90° 45°

135°

180°

0°

225°

315° 270°

Fig. 4.8 The counterclockwise direction of angles in AutoCAD 2004

In this method of constructing accurate drawings the prefix @ precedes each coordinate entry. Once a start point for a construction has been entered, coordinates are entered relative to the last point entered. Relative coordinate entries can be made in conjunction with absolute entries. The rules which govern relative coordinate entry methods are: ve X units are to the right horizontally. ve X units are to the left horizontally. ve Y units are vertically upwards. ve Y units are vertically downwards. The symbol followed by a number indicates an angle in a counterclockwise (anticlockwise) direction in the full 360° range of angles (Fig. 4.8). First example – relative coordinate entry (Fig. 4.9)

Call the Line tool. The command line shows: Command:_line Specify first point: 50,250 Specify next point or [Undo]: @50,0 Specify next point or [Undo]: 150,200 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @100,0 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 280,170 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 250,140 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @100,0 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 100,90 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @50,0

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 40

40

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: c (Close) Command: and the outline given in Fig. 4.9 is drawn. @50,0

50,250

@100,0 150,200 280,170

c(Close) @–100,0

250,140

Fig. 4.9 First example – relative coordinate entry

@–50,0 100,90

Second example – relative coordinate entry (Fig. 4.10)

Call the Line tool. The command line shows: Command:_line Specify first point: 70,160 Specify next point or [Undo]: @60 45 Specify next point or [Undo]: @100,0 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @60 315 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @0,90 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @185,0 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: c (Close) Command: enter c (Circle) right-click Command:_circle Specify center of circle or [3P/2P/Ttr]: .t (tan, tan., Radius). Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: pick Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: pick Specify radius of circle: 25 Command: Repeat for the other R25 circle followed by the two R15 circles. @100,0

15

R25

<3

60

60

@

@

<

45

Fig. 4.10 Second example – relative coordinate entry

@0,–90

c(Close)

70,180

R15

@–185,0

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 41

Accuracy when drawing

41

Note

The x,y,z coordinate numbers show in the left-hand end of the status bar. Pressing the keys Ctrl and D simultaneously toggles between the coordinates showing as absolute numbers to relative numbers to the numbers being greyed out. Fig. 4.11 shows the coordinate numbers showing in the relative coordinate style.

Fig. 4.11 Relative coordinates showing in the status bar

Tracking When using the Line tool (or the Polyline tool – see Chapter 5), if a point in an outline has been picked or coordinates have been entered for the point, a rubber band line attached to the point can be dragged anywhere on screen by movement of the mouse. If the rubber band is dragged in a chosen direction and then a number enter at the keyboard, followed by a right-click, a line is drawn of the entered length in the direction dragged by the rubber-banded line. Example – tracking (Fig. 4.12)

Call the Line tool. Command:_line Specify first point: 40,220 Specify next point or: drag to the right enter 70 Specify next point: drag vertically up enter 40 Specify next point: drag to the right enter 160 Specify next point: drag vertically down enter 70 Specify next point: drag to the left enter 70 Specify next point: drag vertically down enter 30 Continue thus until: Specify next point: c (Close) Command:

Object Snaps The use of Object Snaps is another way of ensuring accuracy when constructing drawings in AutoCAD 2004. As the name implies, object snaps (or osnaps) are designed to ensure that when new objects are added to a drawing they snap onto exact positions relative to other objects on screen. Object snaps can be toggled on/off with clicks on the OSNAP button in the status bar. Osnaps can be set by entering os at the command line, which brings the Drafting Settings dialog on screen (Fig. 4.13).

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 42

42

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 160

70

70

40

40,220

90

30

70

70 70

Fig. 4.12 Example – tracking

40

70

160

Fig. 4.13 The Drafting Settings dialog

In the dialog, click the Object Snap tab and in the sub-dialog which appears click the check box against Object Snap on (F3), followed with clicks in those osnaps the operator wishes to use. In Fig. 4.13 the osnaps Endpoint, Midpoint, Center, Quadrant and Intersection have been set on (ticks in check boxes). With these settings, when an object is added to other objects, the relative osnap icon and tooltip appear as the new object is snapped to its

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 43

Accuracy when drawing

43

required position on the existing objects. Fig. 4.14 shows several examples involving lines and circles. Another way of using osnaps is to turn them off and to enter abbreviations for the osnaps at the command line. The most frequently used of these abbreviations are: end – Endpoint. mid – Midpoint. cen – Center. qua – Quadrant. int – Intersection. nod – Node. ext – Extension. tan – Tangent. nea – Nearest. par – Parallel.

Fig. 4.14 Examples of osnap icons and tooltips

Example – using osnap abbreviations (Fig. 4.15)

1. Draw the two circles given in Fig. 4.15. 2. Call Line and at the command line: Command:_line Specify first point: enter tan right-click to pick the larger circle Specify next point: tan

160 R55 R30

Fig. 4.15 Example – using osnaps – the two circles

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 44

44

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

to pick the smaller circle Specify next point: right-click Command:_line Specify first point: enter cen right-click of pick the larger circle Specify next point: 70,75 Specify next point: right-click Command:_line Specify first point: enter qua right-click of pick the larger circle Specify next point: enter tan right-click to pick the smaller circle Specify next point: right-click Command:_line and continue in this manner until the drawing given in Fig. 4.16 has been completed.

Defferred Tangent

Center

Quadrant

Fig. 4.16 Example – osnap tooltips

AutoSnap Additional features can be included in snap points with the use of AutoSnap. To set AutoSnap on right-click in the command window and from the right-click menu which appears click Options . . . . The Options dialog appears (Fig. 4.17). In the dialog click the Drafting tab and ensure the check boxes against the AutoSnap options are all on (ticks in boxes). To ensure AutoSnap is working osnap must be set on – press the F3 function key or click the OSNAP button in the status bar. With all the AutoSnap options set on another feature appears with osnaps – the AutoSnap aperture box as shown for Endpoint (Fig. 4.18).

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 45

Accuracy when drawing

45

Fig. 4.17 Selecting Options . . . from the right-click menu in the command window and the Options dialog

Polar tracking

Endpoint

Fig. 4.18 The aperture box of AutoSnap

Open the Drawing Settings dialog and click the Polar Tracking tab. In the ensuing sub-dialog select 5 from the Increment angle popup list and click the radio buttons against Track using all polar angle settings and Relative to last segment to set these parameters on (dots in circles). Fig. 4.19 shows these settings in the dialog. When such settings have been made and the POLAR button in the status bar is set on, when objects are added to existing objects a tooltip such as that shown in Fig. 4.20 appears at the end of the added object. Note that the OSNAP button can be off yet Polar tracking tooltips still appear, provided the POLAR button is set on. Another method of toggling Polar tracking is by pressing the F10 function key. An example of a drawing involving decimals (Fig. 4.22)

While in an A3_template screen, open the Units dialog and reset the Precision figure to 2 figures after the decimal point (Fig. 4.21). Do not save the template to the name A3_template. Now using the Line tool, construct the drawing given in Fig. 4.22 using tracking to ensure accurate lengths of each line. To ensure that the lines are truly vertical and horizontal, set ORTHO on, either with a click on the ORTHO button in the status bar or by pressing the F8 function key.

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 46

46

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 4.19 Settings in the Polar Tracking sub-dialog from Drawing Settings

Fig. 4.20 The tooltip showing when Polar tracking is set on

Relative Polar: 92 < 225°

Snap, Ortho and Grid

Fig. 4.21 Resetting Precision in the Units dialog

With the A3_template on screen and with Snap set on (SNAP button in status bar or F9 function key), the cursors under mouse control jump between the snap points – in our template set to 5 units. The cursors are not able to be moved to any position not a snap point. If a drawing in 5 unit intervals is being constructed, full use can be made of these snap points. This does not prevent the effective use of osnaps which override snap points or when lengths other than multiples of 5 are drawn, say by tracking. When constructing drawings, toggling Snap on/off can be of value, and full use should be made of this facility by toggling with the function key F8 or clicking the SNAP button in the status bar. Similarly full use can be made of toggling Ortho on/off function key F8 or clicking the ORTHO button in the status bar. Toggling Grid points on/off – F7 key or GRID button – can also be of value at times.

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 47

Accuracy when drawing 45.76

90.95

49.50

123.58

47

Fig. 4.22 An example of a drawing involving decimals

Revision tips 1. All drawings in this chapter have been constructed in an A3_template.dwt. 2. When a drawing has been constructed it is advisable to save it to a floppy disk. 3. The Ttr prompt of the Circle prompts sequence is used to draw circles tangential to other objects on screen. 4. When using relative coordinate entry each next point is at a length and angle to the object from which it is being drawn. 5. Use the prefix @ for a length relative entry and for the angle at which the object is to be drawn relative to the object on screen. 6. When using the tracking method set ORTHO on to draw lines vertically and horizontally. 7. F7 toggles Grid on/off; F8 toggles ORTHO on/off; F9 toggles SNAP on/off; CtrlD (or F5) toggles coordinates appearing in the status bar between relative and absolute numbers. 8. Use Object Snaps to snap to parts of objects on screen. 9. AutoSnap is of value at times. 10. Polar tracking gives length and angle tooltips for the next object to be drawn. 11. Set the Precision number in the Units dialog to construct objects with precise length to a number of decimal places. 12. Toggling Snap, Ortho and Grid can add efficiency when constructing drawings in AutoCAD 2004.

Exercises Construct each drawing in answer to the following exercises on A3_ template.dwt templates and make full use of Object Snap. Do not attempt adding dimensions. 1. Using the Line and Arc tools, construct the plate shown in the drawing given in Fig. 4.23.

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 48

48

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

20

70

R

40

190

Fig. 4.23 Exercise 1

2. Fig. 4.24 shows an outline which has been drawn using the Line and Arc tools with inner circles each tangential to either the outline or to other circles using the Circle tool. Construct the given drawing. These 4 circles are R20

235

160

65

R40

40

R40

5 11

135

Fig. 4.24 Exercise 2

3. Set Precision in the Units dialog to 4 numbers after the decimal points and then using the tracking method construct an accurate copy of the drawing in Fig. 4.25. 4. Construct the drawing in Fig. 4.26 using the Line and Arc tools. Note

The two exercises 5 and 6 involve the drawing of two-view orthographic projections (see Chapter 10). They also involve the use of Hidden lines for showing hidden detail and Centre lines which are drawn through the centre of all circular parts of a drawing. To draw hidden detail lines, first click in the area of the Layers field and again on the layer name hidden. The layer name appears in the Layers field which makes the hidden layer current (Fig. 4.27) and all objects then added to a drawing

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 49

Accuracy when drawing

60.1900

127.7585

67.5685

205.7655

84.0358

Fig. 4.25 Exercise 3

121.5194

R80 R90

R5

R4

0

140

195

20

0

R15

Fig. 4.26 Exercise 4

Fig. 4.27 Making the hidden layer current

50

49

0750661763-ch004 1/12/04 4:51 PM Page 50

50

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

are in hidden detail dashed line of a colour blue. Similarly centre lines are added to a drawing following the setting of the centre layer as current. 5. Fig. 4.28 is a pictorial drawing of component shown in the two-view orthographic projection given in Fig. 4.29. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 4.29 including the hidden and centre lines, but do not include the dimensions. 90

Hole Ø40

R30

145

20

Fig. 4.28 Exercise 5 – a pictorial drawing

Hole Ø30

Ø40

Fig. 4.29 Exercise 5

6. Fig. 4.30 is a pictorial drawing of the component shown in the twoview orthographic projection Fig. 4.31. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 4.31 including the hidden and centre lines, but do not include any dimensions. 80

155

R35

30

110

Fig. 4.30 Exercise 6 – a pictorial drawing

R30

Fig. 4.31 Exercise 6

15

Holes Ø20

R20

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 51

CHAPTER 5

More tools from the Draw toolbar

Aims of this chapter The aim of this chapter is to introduce constructing drawings using tools from the Draw toolbar which have not yet been shown in earlier chapters. Some of the tools in the toolbar – Insert Block, Make Block, Hatch, Region and Multiline Text will be described in later chapters.

The Polyline tool

Fig. 5.1 The Polyline tool in the Draw toolbar

This tool is among the most frequently used of the AutoCAD 2004 tools. The major difference between the Line tool and the Polyline tool is that a rectangle, say, constructed with the line tool will consist of four objects, whereas a rectangle constructed using the Polyline tool is a single object in its own right. But, in addition to drawing lines with the tool, polylines (plines) can be drawn to any width and can be drawn as arcs. To call the tool, either left-click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.1) or enter pl or pline at the command line. Upon being called the command line shows: Command:_pline Specify start point: pick a point or enter coordinates Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: First example – Polyline – Width (Fig. 5.2)

Call the Polyline tool. The command line shows: Command:_pline Specify start point: 20,240 Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: enter w (Width) right-click Specify starting width 0: 2 Specify ending width 2: right-click Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 190,240 Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 190,200 51

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 52

52

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 20,240

190,240

190,200

20,200

290,180 210,180 80,140 210,100 290,180 190,80

20,80

190,40

20,40

Fig. 5.2 First example – Polyline

and so on until: Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 20,200 Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: c (Close) Command: Second example – Polyline – Arc (Fig. 5.3)

Call Polyline. The command line shows: Command:_pline Specify start point: 40,120 Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: enter w (Width) right-click Specify starting width 0: 5 Specify ending width 5: right-click Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: @85,0 190,250 @85,0

@85,0

40,210 255,210

@0,–90

c (Close)

125,120 @–80,0

@–85,0

Fig. 5.3 Second example – Polyline – Arc

190,80

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 53

More tools from the Draw toolbar

53

Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: enter a (Arc) right-click Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/ Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/Width]: enter s (Second pt) right-click Specify second point of arc: 190,250 Specify end point of arc: 255,210 Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/ Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/Width]: enter l (Line) right-click Specify next point or Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: @85,0 and so on until the pline is closed. Third example – Polyline – Circle (Fig. 5.4)

In the following examples long prompt sequences, which have already been shown in examples 1 and 2, will be replaced by: [prompts]: Call the Polyline tool. The command line shows: Command:_pline Specify start point: 110,150 [prompts]: w Specify starting width 0: 1 Specify ending width 1: right-click [prompts]: a (Arc) [prompts]: s (Second pt) Specify second point of arc: 170,210 Specify end point of arc: 230,150 [prompts]: cl (CLose) Command: and the circle given in Fig. 5.4 is drawn. 170,210

110,150

230,150

Fig. 5.4 Third example Polyline – Circle

Fourth example – Polyline – Arrows (Fig. 5.5)

Call the Polyline tool. The command line shows: Command:_pline Specify start point: 70,220

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 54

54

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 155

60

Fig. 5.5 Fourth example – Polyline – Arrow

[prompts]: w Specify starting width 0: 4 Specify ending width 4: right-click [prompts]: @155,0 [prompts]: w Specify starting width 0: 20 Specify ending width 20: 0 [prompts]: @60,0 [prompts]: right-click Command: Fifth example – Polyline – Fill (Fig. 5.6)

1. Call Polyline and construct the two plines shown in Fig. 5.6 as follows: Command:_pline Specify start point: 60,230 [prompts]: w Specify starting width 0: 25 Specify ending width 25: right-click [prompts]:@180,0 [prompts]: w Specify starting width 0: 60 Specify ending width 60: 0 [prompts]: @100,0 [prompts]: right-click Command:

60

100

25

180

15 R1

10

40

Fig. 5.6 Fifth example – Polyline – Fill ON

85

70 25

95

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 55

More tools from the Draw toolbar

55

2. Turn the set variable FILL off as follows: Command: enter fill right-click Enter mode [ON/OFF] ON: enter off right-click Command: enter re (Regen) right-click The drawing regenerates giving the result as shown in Fig. 5.7.

Fig. 5.7 Fifth example – Polyline – Fill OFF

The Construction Line tool Construction lines are of infinite length – this means that no matter how large the limits of the drawing area, each construction line will extend to the edges of the area. Construction lines are used to lay out a foundation in which drawings can be constructed. When drawing construction lines they should be drawn on a new layer of Construction preferably of a colour not used for other layers. An example of such a layer showing in the layers popup list is given in Fig. 5.8.

Fig. 5.8 A Construction layer included in the layers popup list

To call the tool either left-click on the Construction Line tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.9) or enter xl or xline at the command line, which then shows: Command:_xline Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]:

Fig. 5.9 The Construction Line tool icon in the Draw toolbar

Enter h as a response and horizontal construction lines can be placed within the drawing area; v and vertical lines; a and lines at an angle; b and lines will bisect other construction lines at a selected point; o and lines will be offset by a specified distance from existing construction lines, whatever their position or angle.

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 56

56

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Example – Construction Line (Figs 5.10–5.12)

1. Open the A3_template.dwt through the New . . . from the File dropdown menu. 2. In the layers popup list click Construction to make that layer current. 3. Call Construction Line tool and at the command line: Command:_xline Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]: enter v right-click Specify through point: enter 75,70 right-click Command: right-click Command:_xline Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]: enter h right-click Specify through point: enter 10,25 right-click Command: right-click Command:_xline Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]: enter o right-click Specify offset distance 0: enter 95 right-click Select a line object: pick the horizontal xline Specify side to offset: pick above the line Continue offsetting the lines until the lines as shown in Fig. 5.10 are completed. When complete, click the 0 layer in the layer popup list to make layer 0 the current layer.

40

105

95

40

105

130

Fig. 5.10 Example – Construction Line – the construction lines

4. Using the construction lines as guidelines construct the outlines of the three-view orthographic projection (see Chapter 10) as in Fig. 5.11. 5. In the layer’s popup list click the Turn a layer On or Off icon against the Construction name.

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 57

More tools from the Draw toolbar

57

Fig. 5.11 Construction Line – the orthographic drawing within the construction lines

6. Set layer Hidden current and add hidden detail. 7. Set layer Centre current and add centre lines. The result is given in Fig. 5.12.

Fig. 5.12 Example – Construction Line – the orthographic projection with the Construction layer off

The Polygon tool The Polygon tool constructs regular polygons with a various number of sides. The two features of regular polygons are – all sides are the same length and all angles are the same size. Polygons constructed with this

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 58

58

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 5.13 The Polygon tool icon in the Draw toolbar

tool may be inscribed within or circumscribed outside a circle. Note that polygons drawn with this tool are polylines. To call the tool either click the Polygon tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.13) or enter pol at the command line. When called the command line shows: Command:_polygon Enter number of sides 4: Examples – Polygons (Fig. 5.14)

1. Call the Polygon tool. The command line shows: Command:_polygon Enter number of sides 4: enter 6 right-click Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: 70,220 Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle]: I: right-click Specify radius of circle: 60 Command: The result is shown in drawing 1 of Fig. 5.14. 2. Repeat to construct a six-sided polygon circumscribed about a circle of radius 55 of centre 205,220, drawing 2 of Fig. 5.14. 3. Now construct polygons of sides 7 (inscribed), 8 (circumscribed), 9 (circumscribed) and 10 (inscribed and of Edge length) – Drawings 3, 4, 5 and 6 of Fig. 5.14. The centres are shown in Fig. 5.14.

1

2

3

70,220 Inscribed

205,220 Circumscribed

345,220

4

5

70,90

205,90

6 35

Fig. 5.14 Examples – Polygons

Note

5-sided polygons are pentagons. 6-sided polygons are hexagons. 7-sided polygons are heptagons. 8-sided polygons are octagons. 9-sided polygons are nonagons. 10-sided polygons are decagons.

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 59

More tools from the Draw toolbar

59

The Rectangle tool

Fig. 5.15 The Rectangle tool icon in the Draw toolbar

To call the Rectangle tool either click the Rectangle tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.15) or enter rec at the command line. When the tool is called the command line shows: Command:_rectang Specify corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: Examples – Rectangle tool (Fig. 5.16) Top left-hand drawing of Fig. 5.16

In an A3_template.dwt screen call the Rectangle tool. The command line shows: Command:_rectang Specify corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: 10,270 Specify other corner or [Dimensions]: 140,200 Command: Top right-hand drawing of Fig. 5.16

Command:_rectang Specify corner point or [prompts]: 165,270 Specify other corner or [Dimensions]: enter d right-click Specify length for rectangles 0: 110 Specify width for rectangles 0: 80 Command: Lower left-hand drawing of Fig. 5.16

Command:_rectang Specify corner point or [prompts]: enter c right-click Specify first chamfer distance for rectangles 0: 15 Specify second chamfer distance for rectangles 15: Specify corner point or [prompts]: 15,155 Specify other corner or [Dimensions]: 125,90 Command: Lower right-hand drawing of Fig. 5.16

Command:_rectang Specify corner point or [prompts]: enter f right-click Specify fillet radius for rectangles 0: 15 Specify corner point or [prompts]: 170,165 Specify other corner or [Dimensions]: 265,90 Command: The results of drawing these four rectangles are shown in Fig. 5.16.

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 60

60

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 5.16 Example – Rectangle tool

Normal rectangle

Width = 4 Dimensions 110 by 80

Width = 1 Fillet radius =15

Width = 2 Chamfers 15 by 15

Note

Fig. 5.17 shows two rectangles of the same length and width, with one at an Elevation of 0 and Thickness of 0, with the second at an Elevation of 80 and Thickness of 5. When the two rectangles had been constructed they were placed in a SW Isometric viewing position by clicking on Views in the menu bar and clicking on 3D Views, followed by another click on SW Isometric in the sub-menu which appears.

Rectangle at Elevation of 80 and Thickness 5

Fig. 5.17 Two rectangles of different Elevations and Thicknesses

Rectangle of corners 100,200 and 200,120

The Ellipse tool Ellipses can be regarded as circles which have been rotated and then viewed as indicated in Fig. 5.18. What is seen is an ellipse.

Circle from which ellipse is derived

Fig. 5.18 An ellipse can be regarded as what is seen when a circle is rotated

Circle as seen from left results in an ellipse Circle rotated at 45° and viewed from left

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 61

minor axis

More tools from the Draw toolbar

major axis

Fig. 5.19 Major and minor axes of an ellipse

Ellipses have two axes – a major axis and a minor axis (Fig. 5.19). The major axis can be regarded as the diameter of the circle from which the ellipse can be thought of as being generated. To call the Ellipse tool, either click its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.20) or enter el at the command line. When called, the command line shows: Command:_ellipse Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: Examples – Ellipse (Fig. 5.21)

Open an A3_template.dwt. Call the Ellipse tool: Fig. 5.20 The Ellipse tool in the Draw toolbar

61

Top-left drawing of Fig. 5.21

Command:_ellipse Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: 20,240 Specify other endpoint of axis: 150,240 Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: 25 Command: Top right-hand drawing of Fig. 5.21

Command:_ellipse Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: c Specify center of ellipse: 290,240 Specify endpoint of axis: 385,240 Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: 290,280 Command: Lower left-hand drawing of Fig. 5.21

Command:_ellipse Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: c Specify center of ellipse: 85,110 Specify endpoint of axis: 150,160 Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: r Specify rotation around major axis: 45 Command: Lower right-hand drawing of Fig. 5.21

Command:_ellipse Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: c Specify center of ellipse: 290,110 Specify endpoint of axis: 400,110 Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: 290,125 Command:

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 62

62

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

25

290,280 20,24

150,240

290,240

385,240

150,160 290,125 85,110

290,110

400,110

Rotation = 45

Fig. 5.21 Examples – Ellipse

The set variable PELLIPSE

Ellipses in AutoCAD 2004 can be drawn as true ellipses or as polylines in the shape of ellipses. The type to be drawn is based upon the setting of the variable PELLIPSE. Set to 0, ellipses will be drawn as true shapes. If set to 1, ellipses are polylines. To set the variable: Command: enter pellipse right-click Enter new value for PELLIPSE 0: enter 1 right-click Command: and the variable is now set for ellipses to be drawn as polylines.

The Revcloud tool

Fig. 5.22 The Revcloud tool icon in the Draw toolbar

The Revcloud tool is useful for drawing attention to parts of drawing – either for example, to ask for a revision of that area of a drawing within the ‘cloud’ or to ensure that the area is regarded as being of importance. To call the tool, either click its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.22) or enter revcloud at the command line. Example – Revcloud (Fig. 5.23)

Fig. 5.23 is a drawing of an arm to be placed in a support bracket. The hole in the arm may be an incorrect size. The revcloud is drawn around the part to draw attention to the problem. Call Revcloud and: Command:_revcloud Minimum arc length: 1 Maximum arc length 1 Specify start point or [Arc length/Object]: a (Arc length) Specify minimum arc length 1: 10 Specify maximum arc length: 10: right-click Specify start point or [Object]: pick

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 63

More tools from the Draw toolbar

63

Guide cross-hairs along cloud path: do so until start point is reached Revision cloud finished. Command:

20

35

R15

50

140

Check the hole diameter

Hole Ø20 R20

40

10

Holes Ø20

40

R20

10

180 R30

Fig. 5.23 Example – Revcloud

The Spline tool Fig. 5.24 The Spline tool in the Draw toolbar

The Spline tool will construct very smooth curves through fixed points. To call the spline either click its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.24) or enter spl. The command line shows: Command:_spline Specify first point or [Object]: pick Specify next point: pick Specify next point or [Close/Fit/Tolerance]: pick Continue until: Specify start tangent: right-click Specify end tangent: right-click Command: An example is given in Fig. 5.25.

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 64

64

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design next point

Fig. 5.25 Example – Spline

first point

next point

next point

next point

next point

next point

The Point tool Before adding a point to a drawing click Point Style . . . in the Format drop-down menu (Fig. 5.26) and select the style to be used from the Point Style dialog which appears (Fig. 5.27), followed by a click on the dialog’s OK button. If required, the size of the point can be set in the Point Size field.

Fig. 5.26 Select Point Style . . . from the Format drop-down menu

Fig. 5.27 The Point Style dialog

To place a point in a drawing either click the Point tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 5.28) or enter po at the command line:

Fig. 5.28 The Point tool in the Draw toolbar

Command:_point Current point modes: PDMODE 2 PDSIZE 0 Specify a point: pick or enter coordinates Command:

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 65

More tools from the Draw toolbar

65

Note

The remaining tools in the Draw toolbar will be described in other parts of this book.

Revision tips 1. A closed polyline is a single object no matter how many sides it possesses. 2. An outline constructed with the Line tool consists of the same number of objects as the outline’s sides. 3. Construction lines should be drawn on a specific layer. 4. Construction lines are of infinite length. 5. A polygon can be drawn, given the radius of a circumscribing circle or the radius of an inscribing circle or the length of one of its edges. 6. Rectangles can be drawn with the Rectangle tool with chamfered corners, with filleted corners and/or of specified line widths. 7. Rectangles drawn with the Rectangle tool are plines. 8. Polygons drawn with the Polygon tool are plines. 9. The PELLIPSE variable can be set to allow ellipses to be drawn as true shapes or as plines. A setting of 0 results in a true ellipse and a setting of 1, a pline. 10. Ellipses have two axes – a major and a minor. The major ellipse can be regarded as the same length as the diameter of the circle from which the ellipse has been derived. 11. Use the Revcloud tool to emphasise part of a drawing.

Exercises 1. The drawing shown in Fig. 5.29 was constructed using the Polygon and Arc tools. When the drawing had been constructed, all lines and arcs were changed to plines of width 1 using Polyline Edit.

Plines of width 1

Fig. 5.29 Exercise 1

110

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 66

66

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

2. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 5.30 using the Polyline tool.

70

Fig. 5.30 Exercise 2

3. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 5.31 using the Polyline tool.

15

70

180 20

95 R5

Plines are of width = 1

5

Fig. 5.31 Exercise 3

105

165

25

90

4. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 5.32 using the Polyline and Polygon tools. When completed change the hexagons to plines of width 2. 5. Construct the arrows given in Fig. 5.33 using the Polyline tool. 6. Fig. 5.34 is a view of part of plate from an engineering artefact. Construct the view using only the Polyline tool with plines of width 0.7. 7. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 5.35 using the ellipse tool. 8. Fig. 5.36 is a pictorial drawing of the angle bracket shown by a threeview orthographic projection within construction lines in Fig. 5.37. Draw the construction lines on the Construction layer and the outlines of the three views on layer 0. 9. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 5.38 using only the Rectangle tool.

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 67

More tools from the Draw toolbar

45

275 215

All plines of width 2 155 195

15

50

Fig. 5.32 Exercise 4

70

65

45

185

120

Pline arc’s width = 2 Arrow head’s width = 20

Fig. 5.33 Exercise 5

55

130

Ø70 Ø230

R10

Fig. 5.34 Exercise 6

30

25

67

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 68

68

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

190

20

R10

Fig. 5.35 Exercise 7

Fig. 5.36 Exercise 8 – a pictorial drawing

55

90

90

40

90

90

Fig. 5.37 Exercise 8

Holes are Ø10

0750661763-ch005 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 69

More tools from the Draw toolbar

25 20

Fillets R5 Width 2

Fig. 5.38 Exercise 9

110 230

25 20

230 110

69

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 70

CHAPTER 6

The Modify tools

Aims of this chapter The contents of this chapter are intended to: 1. Introduce the tools in the Modify toolbar. 2. Show methods of modifying drawings or parts of drawings using tools from the Modify toolbar.

The Modify toolbar As the name of the toolbar implies, tools in this toolbar are designed to modify constructions already on screen. These tools have a similar importance to those in the Draw toolbar in that they are among the more frequently used tools when working in AutoCAD 2004. Fig. 6.1 shows the toolbar when it has been dragged from its usual position (either docked against the left-hand or the right-hand edges of the AutoCAD 2004 window). All the tools in the toolbar except the Erase tool (the tool icon at the left-hand of the toolbar in Fig. 6.1) and the Explode tool (at the right-hand end in Fig. 6.1) are described in this chapter. The Erase tool has been shown in worked examples in Chapter 1 and the use of the Explode tool will be described in Chapter 13.

Fig. 6.1 The Modify toolbar dragged from its docked position

The Copy Object tool To call this tool either click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.2) or enter cp, co or copy at the command line which then shows: Fig. 6.2 The Copy Object tool icon in the Modify toolbar 70

Command:_copy Select objects: pick 1 found Select objects: right-click

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 71

The Modify tools

71

First example – Copy Object – single copy (Fig. 6.4)

1. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 6.3. All parts of the drawing are plines of width 0.7. 280

Chamfers 20×20

R10 10

180

60

Fig. 6.3 First example – Copy Object – original drawing

2. Call the Copy Object tool. The command line shows: Command:_copy Select objects: pick (Fig. 6.4) 1 found Select objects: right-click Specify base point or displacement or [Multiple]: pick Specify second point of displacement: pick Command: The result is shown in Fig. 6.4.

Base point

Second point

Fig. 6.4 First example – Copy Object

Second example – Copy Object – multiple copy (Fig. 6.5)

1. Enter u at the command line to undo the copy. 2. Call Copy Object again. At the command line: Command:_copy Select objects: pick 1 found Select objects: right-click Specify base point or displacement or [Multiple]: enter m

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 72

72

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify base point: pick Specify second point of displacement: pick Specify second point of displacement: pick Specify second point of displacement: pick Specify second point of displacement: right-click Command: The result is shown in Fig. 6.5.

Base point Second point

Fig. 6.5 Second example – Copy Object

The Mirror tool To call this tool either click the Mirror tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.6) or enter mi at the command line. Fig. 6.6 The Mirror tool icon in the Modify toolbar

First example – Mirror (Fig. 6.8)

1. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 6.7 with the Polyline tool set with a width 0.7. 2. Call the Mirror tool. The command line shows: Command:_mirror Select objects: window the drawing 2 found First point of mirror line

Ø45

140

20 20

20 20 25

Fig. 6.7 First example – Mirror – outlines to be mirrored

Second point of mirror line

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 73

The Modify tools

73

Specify first point of mirror line: pick Specify second point of mirror line: pick Delete source objects N: right-click Command: The result is shown in Fig. 6.8.

The variable MIRRTEXT Fig. 6.8 First example – Mirror

MIRRTEXT = 1

Command: enter mirrtext Enter new value for MIRRTEXT 0: enter 1 right-click Command:

1 = TXETRRIM

MIRRTEXT = 1

MIRRTEXT = 0

If text is to be mirrored the set variable MIRRTEXT must first be set. The variable is set as follows:

Fig. 6.9 shows the results of the two different settings of the variable. The mirroring for both examples are shown horizontally and vertically. MIRRTEXT = 0

The Offset tool MIRRTEXT = 0

Fig. 6.9 Results of setting MIRRTEXT

To call this tool click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.10) or enter o at the command line. First example – Offset (Fig. 6.11)

Fig. 6.10 The Offset tool icon from the Modify toolbar

1. 2. 3. 4.

Construct drawing 1 as a pline of width 0.7 (Fig. 6.11). With Mirror, mirror draw 1 to produce drawing 2. With Pedit join the two plines to form a single pline. Call Offset. The command line shows: Command:_offset Specify offset distance or [Through] Through: 2

50

20 20

20

20 20

20

R20

Fig. 6.11 First example – Offset

1

2

3

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 74

74

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Select object to offset or exit: pick the outline Specify point on side to offset: click inside the outline Select object to offset or exit: right-click Command: The result is given in Fig. 6.11 drawing 3. Other examples – Offset (Fig. 6.12)

Fig. 6.12 shows three examples of offsets to an ellipse (drawing 1). Drawing 2 shows an offset outside the ellipse by 10 units, drawing 3, an offset inside the ellipse by 2 units and drawing 4 shows offsets both inside and outside the ellipse by 5 units. 2

160

1

Fig. 6.12 Other examples – Offset

4 3

30

Original ellipse

Offset by 10

Offset by 2

Offsets by 5

The Array tool To call this tool either click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.13) or enter ar at the command line. Two types of array are possible using the tool – Rectangular arrays and Polar arrays. First example – Rectangular array (Fig. 6.16)

Fig. 6.13 The Array tool icon in the Modify toolbar

1. Construct a hexagon of edge length 25. 2. Using Offset, offset the hexagon both inside and outside. 3. Call the Array tool. The command line shows: Command:_array The Array dialog appears (Fig. 6.14). 4. Make entries in the dialog as shown in Fig. 6.14: Click the Rectangular Array radio button to set it on (dot in button). Enter 5 in the Rows field and 8 in the Columns field. Enter 53 in the Row offset field and 62 in the Column offset field. 5. Click the Select objects button. The dialog disappears. Window the three hexagons and right-click.

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 75

The Modify tools

75

Fig. 6.14 First example – Rectangular Array – the Array dialog

6. The dialog reappears. Click its Preview button. The dialog again disappears. The proposed array appears on screen together with another Array dialog (Fig. 6.15).

Fig. 6.15 First example – Array – the second Array dialog

7. If satisfied, click the Accept button. If changes are thought to be needed, click the Modify button when the Array dialog will reappear to allow changes to be made to the settings. The result is shown in Fig. 6.16. Second example – Polar array (Fig. 6.17)

1. Construct a semicircular pline of width 0.7 with its centre 295,270 (Fig. 6.17). 2. Call the Array tool and make settings as shown in Fig. 6.18: Click in the Polar Array radio button to set it on (dot in button). Total number of items: field enter 16. Angle to fill: field enter 360 although that figure may be in the field anyway. 3. Click the Pick center point button and when the dialog disappears click the point 295,170.

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 76

76

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 6.16 First example – Rectangular Array

The object to be a semicircle of 20 and centre 295,270

Centre point of array 295,170

Fig. 6.17 Second example – Polar Array – semi-circle to be arrayed and the array

4. Click the Preview button. The array appears together with the smaller Array dialog. If the array is satisfactory click the Accept button. If not satisfactory click Modify, and in the dialog make new settings. 5. When finally satisfied with the array click the Array Accept button. The result is given in the right-hand drawing of Fig. 6.17. Note

1. In Rectangular arrays the numbers in the Row offset and Column offset fields may be negative – if the rows of the array are to be downwards from the objects to be arrayed, the Row offset field should carry negative numbers. Similarly if the array is to be to the left of the objects to be arrayed, the Column offset figures should carry negative numbers.

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 77

The Modify tools

77

Fig. 6.18 Second example – Polar Array – the Array dialog with settings for this example

2. Objects in Polar arrays can be arrayed in circular arcs of any angle. To set the angle enter the required angle in the Angle to fill field. Fig. 6.19 shows an example of an array within a circular arc of 180°.

Fig. 6.19 A Polar array of 180°

The Move tool This tool is used in much the same way as is the Copy Object tool as will be seen from the prompt sequences which appear when the tool is called. To call the tool either click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.20) or enter m at the command line. When the tool is called the command line shows:

Fig. 6.20 The Move tool icon in the Modify toolbar

Command:_move Select objects: pick or window the object(s) 1 found Select objects: right-click Specify base point or displacement: pick a suitable point

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 78

78

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify second point of displacement: pick Command: and the object(s) is (are) moved to the second point moved.

The Rotate tool

Fig. 6.21 The Rotate tool icon in the Modify toolbar

When using this tool remember the default rotation direction in AutoCAD 2004 is counterclockwise (anticlockwise). To call this tool either click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.21) or enter ro at the command line. Examples – Rotate (Fig. 6.23)

40

40

30

55

10

30

Fig. 6.22 Example – Rotate – the arrow to be rotated

1. Construct the arrow shown in Fig. 6.22 with the Polyline tool set to a width of 2. 2. With the Copy Object tool multiple copy the arrow seven times. 3. Call the Rotate tool. The command line shows: Command:_rotate Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR counterclockwise ANGBASE 0 Select objects: pick the second arrow Select objects: right-click Specify base point: pick Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: 45 Command: and the arrow is rotated 45° as shown in the first copy in Fig. 6.23. 4. Repeat with the other copies rotating to the angles as shown in Fig. 6.23. 5. Call the Move tool and move each copy to a more suitable position. The results of the rotations are shown in Fig. 6.23.

45° 90°

135°

Base point

225° 180°

270° 315°

Fig. 6.23 Examples – Rotate

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 79

The Modify tools

79

The Scale tool To call this tool either click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.24) or enter sc at the command line. Fig. 6.24 The Scale tool icon in the Modify toolbar

SQ40

Fig. 6.25 Example – Scale – the drawing to be scaled

Examples – Scale (Fig. 6.26)

1. Construct the square and circle shown in Fig. 6.25 using the Polyline tool set to width of 1. Add the horizontal band across the centre of the circle using a pline of width of 10. 2. Copy the drawing five times. 3. Call the Scale tool. The command line shows: Command:_scale Select objects: window the first copy 3 found Select objects: right-click Specify base point: pick Specify scale factor or [Reference]: 1.5 Command: 4. Repeat with the other four copies scaling to the factors given in Fig. 6.26. 5. If necessary, with the Move tool move the scaled drawings so more suitable positions in the AutoCAD drawing area. The results are shown in Fig. 6.26.

Base point

Scaled 1.5 Scaled 2

Scaled 0.5 Scaled 0.75 Scaled 1.25

Fig. 6.26 Examples – Scale

The Stretch tool Examples – Stretch (Fig. 6.28) 30

70

40

10

1. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 6.27 using the Polyline tool set to width of 0.7. 2. Copy the drawing twice. 3. Call the Stretch tool either with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.28) or by entering s at the command line.

R20 Ø20

Fig. 6.27 Example – Stretch – original drawing

In the first copy: Command:_scale Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon . . .

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 80

80

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 6.28 The Stretch tool icon in the Modify toolbar

Select objects: c (crossing) Specify first corner: pick Specify opposite corner: pick 2 found Select objects: right-click Specify base point or displacement: pick Specify second point of displacement: pick Command: The result is shown in the two upper drawings of Fig. 6.29. The lefthand of the pair of drawings shows the crossing window and the base point or displacement point. The right-hand drawing shows the result of stretching to the second point of displacement. In this example note the circle crossed by the crossing-window is unaffected by the stretch. The central pair of drawings shows the result when the circle is included in the crossing-window. The circle moves with the stretch. The lower pair of drawings shows the distortion which can take place when the crossing-window crosses an arc. First corner First point of displacement

Second point

Opposite corner

First point Second point

Fig. 6.29 Examples – Stretch

The Trim tool One of the more frequently used of the Modify tool, used for trimming unwanted parts of objects (Fig. 6.30). First example – Trim No extend (Fig. 6.32)

Fig. 6.30 The Trim tool icon in the Modify toolbar

1. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 6.31 using the Circle and Line tools. 2. Call Trim either with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.30) or enter tr at the command line. The command line shows:

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 81

The Modify tools 95

20

Ø70

Fig. 6.31 First example – Trim objects to be trimmed

81

Command:_trim Current settings: Projection UCS Edge None Select cutting edges . . . Select objects: pick one of the lines 1 found Select objects: pick the other line 1 found. 2 total Select objects: right-click Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: pick the part of the circle between the lines Command: 3. Repeat to trim the lines away from the circle. The result is shown in Fig. 6.32.

Cutting edges

Result – first trimming Object to trim Cutting edge

Object to trim

Result – second trimming

Object to trim After pedit to join and of width 2

Fig. 6.32 First example – Trim

Second example – Trim Extend (Fig. 6.33)

80

130

110

Fig. 6.33 Second example – Trim objects to be trimmed

1. Construct the pline and the pline arcs shown in Fig. 6.33 to a width of 0.7. 2. Call Trim. The command line shows: Command:_trim Current settings: Projection UCS Edge None Select cutting edges . . . Select objects: pick one of the lines 1 found Select objects: pick the other line 1 found. 2 total Select objects: right-click Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: enter e (Edge) right-click Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: pick

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 82

82

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: pick Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: right-click Command: 3. Using Trim extend the arc to the ends of the trimmed line as follows: Command:_trim Current settings: Projection UCS Edge None Select cutting edges . . . Select objects: pick one of the lines 1 found Select objects: pick the other line 1 found. 2 total Select objects: right-click Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: press the shift key and click Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: press the shift key and click Select objects to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: right-click Command: The results of these two trims are shown in the four drawings of Fig. 6.34. Objects to trim

Cutting edges

Result extend

Cutting edge

Shift-select

Result shift-select

Fig. 6.34 Second example – Trim – shift-select

The Extend tool It will have been noted that when using the Trim tool the shift-select prompt allowed an object to be extended. The same effect is obtained by using the Extend tool. To call the tool either click its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.35) or enter ex at the command line. Examples – Extend (Fig. 6.36) Fig. 6.35 The Extend tool icon in the Modify toolbar

1. Draw two plines as indicated in Fig. 6.36 drawing 1. 2. Call Extend. The command line shows:

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 83

The Modify tools

83

Command:_extend Current settings: Projection None. Edge None Select boundary edges . . . Select objects: pick Select objects: right-click Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: pick Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: right-click Command: The result is given in drawing 2 of Fig. 6.36. Boundary edge

Boundary edge

Result

Result

Object to extend 1

Object to extend 3

2

4

Boundary edge Boundary edge 5

6

Objects to extend

Result

7

8 Result

Object to extend

Fig. 6.36 Examples – Extend

3. At the prompt: Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/ Edge/Undo]: enter e right-click Enter an implied extension mode [Extend/No extend]: enter e rightclick Then an object will extend to an implied extension point as illustrated in drawings 3 and 4 of Fig. 6.36. 4. Drawings 7 and 8 of Fig. 6.36 show the results of an implied extension to an arc. The left-hand arc of the two arcs extends to what would have been the fully extended arc of the right-hand arc.

The Break tools The Modify toolbar included two Break tools – Break at Point and Break. The difference between the two tools is that the Break at Point tool can be used to break an object into parts, whereas the Break tool can be used to break portions from an object.

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 84

84

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

The Break at Point tool can be called with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.37). The command line shows: Command:_break Select object: pick Specify second break point or [First point]:_f Specify first break point: pick Specify second point: @ Command:

Fig. 6.37 The Break at Point tool icon in the Modify toolbar

and the object is broken at the point picked in response to the prompt sequence: Specify first break point: pick This can be checked by calling Move and moving either of the parts of the object which has been broken. Note that circles cannot be broken using this tool. Examples – Break (Fig. 6.39)

Fig. 6.38 The Break tool icon in the Modify toolbar

1. Construct a pline (drawing 1), a circle (drawing 3) and a rectangle (drawing 4). 2. Taking the line and the circle as examples, call Break either with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.38) or by entering br at the command line. In each case the command line shows: Command:_break Select object: pick Select second break point or [First]: pick Command: and in each case the object is broken. Note that when breaking a circle the break must be made in a counterclockwise direction. 3. Use the First option on the rectangle (drawing 4), call Break again: Command:_break Select object: pick Specify second break point or [First]: enter f (First) Specify first break point: pick

Select object

Select object

Second point 3

4

1 Result Select object

Second point Select object Second point

Result

2

Fig. 6.39 Examples – Break

Second point

Result

Result

First point

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 85

The Modify tools

85

Specify second break point: pick Command: The results are shown in Fig. 6.39.

The Chamfer tool Examples – Chamfer (Fig. 6.41)

Fig. 6.40 The Chamfer tool icon in the Modify toolbar

1. Construct three rectangles using the Line tool (drawings 1, 2 and 4) and a fourth rectangle using the Polyline tool (drawing 3). 2. Call Chamfer either with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.40) or by entering cha at the command line, which then shows: Command:_chamfer (TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 1. Dist2 1 Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]: enter d right-click Specify first chamfer distance 1: 15 Specify second chamfer distance 15: right-click Select first line: pick Select second line: pick Command: and the chamfer (drawing 1) appears. 3. Drawing 2. At the prompt sequence: Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]: enter t right-click Enter Trim mode [Trim/No trim]: enter n (No trim) right-click and select the two lines for chamfering. 4. Drawing 3. At the prompt sequence: Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]: enter p (Polyline) right-click Select 2D polyline: pick any edge of the pline

1

First line

2

3

Chamfer 15 × 15 TRIM mode

Chamfer 15 × 15 NOTRIM mode

Second line 4

Chamfer 20 × 60°

Fig. 6.41 Examples – Chamfer

Chamfer 15 × 15 TRIM mode Polyline

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 86

86

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

4 lines were chamfered Command: 5. Drawing 4. At the prompt sequence: Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]: enter a (Angle) right-click Specify chamfer length on the first line 1: 20 Specify angle from the first line 0 60 and select the two lines to be chamfered. The results on the four drawings are shown in Fig. 6.41.

The Fillet tool Examples – Fillet (Fig. 6.43)

Fig. 6.42 The Fillet tool icon in the Modify toolbar

1. Construct two rectangles using the Line tool (drawings 1 and 2) and a pline rectangle (drawing 3). 2. Drawing 1. Call the Fillet tool either with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar (Fig. 6.42) or by entering f at the command line, which then shows: Command:_fillet Current settings: Mode TRIM. Radius 1 Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: enter r (Radius) right-click Specify fillet radius 1: 15 Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: pick Select second object: pick Command: and the fillet is formed – drawing 1. 3. Drawing 2. Set No TRIM at the prompts sequence: Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: enter t (Trim) right-click Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim]: enter n (No trim) rightclick Followed by selecting the two lines where the fillet is to be formed. 4. Drawing 3. Set the Polyline prompt by: Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: enter p (Polyline) right-click Select 2D polyline pick any edge of the pline Command: and all four corners of the polyline are filleted (Fig. 6.43). First object 1

2 Fillet R15 TRIM mode

Fig. 6.43 Examples – Fillet

Second object

3

Fillet R15 NOTRIM mode

Fillet R15 TRIM mode Polyline

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 87

The Modify tools

87

Revision tips 1. The Copy Object tool can be used for making single or multiple copies of objects. 2. When using the Mirror tool take care if text is included in the operation that the variable MIRRTEXT is set as necessary. 3. When using the Offset tool the offset distance can be set by picking two points on the screen for the distance. 4. Arrays can be Rectangular or Polar. When setting rectangular arrays, set Y distances must be negative in the perpendicular downward direction. Polar arrays can be of any required angle. 5. When using the Rotate tool bear in mind that the default rotate direction is counterclockwise (anticlockwise). 6. When stretching using the Stretch tool, bear in mind that circles are unaffected by the stretching if the crossing window passed through the circle. 7. The Trim and the Extend tools allow trimming and extension to implied extensions. 8. The Break at Point tool is used to break objects into two parts. The Break tool is used to break gaps in objects. 9. The Chamfer and the Fillet tools have similar prompts sequences, the main difference begin that when chamfering two distances are required, whereas when filleting only the radius requires to be stated.

Exercises 1. Construct Fig. 6.44 as follows: (a) Construct the rectangle as shown – a pline of width 0.7. Fillet its corners to a radius of 20. (b) Construct a pentagon circumscribing a circle of radius 20. (c) Draw the inscribed circle. (d) Copy the pentagon and its circle and rotate them through 36° with a rotation base point at the centre of the circle. (e) Erase the circles.

250

40

40

Fig. 6.44 Exercise 1

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 88

88

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 100

100

2.

Fig. 6.45 Exercise 2

3.

4.

5.

(f ) Move the copied and rotated hexagon to its original position. (g) Trim to obtain the star shape as shown. (h) With Pedit join the trimmed parts together and form a pline of width 0.7. (i) Multiple copy the star shape as shown. Construct Fig. 6.45 as follows: (a) Set PELLIPSE to 1. (b) Construct an ellipse 80 10. (c) Multiple copy the ellipse twice and rotate one through 45° and the other through 90°. (d) Move the copied, rotated ellipses back to the centre of the original ellipse. (e) Zoom and mirror the 45° rotated ellipse. (f ) Trim the ellipses to obtain the shape as shown. (g) With Pedit join and form the trimmed parts into a pline of width 0.7. (h) Mirror the pline to the right, then mirror both plines vertically downwards. Construct Fig. 6.46 as follows: (a) Construct the left-hand drawing to the given dimensions. (b) Trim and pedit to form a pline to be arrayed of width 1. (c) Polar array the pline twelve times to produce the right-hand drawing. Construct Fig. 6.47 as follows: (a) Construct a pline ‘cross’ of width 1, in which each edge is 20 units long. (b) Offset internally by 5. (c) Form an array of seven columns and four rows. Construct Fig. 6.48 as follows: (a) Set PELLIPSE to 1. (b) Construct the left-hand drawing. (c) With Trim and Pedit produce the centre drawing for the left-hand drawing. The plines should finish at a width of 1.

20

40 20

R20

Fig. 6.46 Exercise 3

R110

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 89

The Modify tools

89

Fig. 6.47 Exercise 4

(d) With Copy, Rotate and Move construct the right-hand drawing. The rotations are through 30°, 60° and 90°. 6. Construct Fig. 6.49 as follows: (a) Drawing 1 is a circle crossed by two lines at 45°. (b) Drawing 2 is drawing 1 with all parts offset by 5 units, trimmed, and with Pedit changed to plines of width 1. (c) Drawing 3 is drawing 2 scaled to 0.75 and then arranged as a rectangular array with four rows and four columns spaced at 50 units and angled at 315°. 7. To construct Fig. 6.50, proceed as follows: (a) Set PELLIPSE to 1. (b) Construct drawing 1 using Ellipse, Line, Offset and Pedit to end up with the drawing as a pline of width 1. (c) Drawing 2. Call Stretch and stretch the drawing vertically downwards by 20 units. R20

165

Offset 5

90

10

75

40

Fig. 6.48 Exercise 5

Plines tangential to ellipse

0750661763-ch006 1/12/04 4:52 PM Page 90

90

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 1

2

3

Fig. 6.49 Exercise 6

1

155

2 25 30

95

Ellipses 40 × 20

3

4

Fig. 6.50 Exercise 7

(d) Drawing 3. Stretch the drawing horizontally by 50 units with the crossing window to the left of the right-hand ellipse. (e) Drawing 4. Stretch the drawing horizontally with the crossing window passing through the centre of the right-hand ellipse. Note

In this exercise it will be noted that when stretching the ellipses they changed shape. If you now reset the PELLIPSE variable to 0 and draw an ellipse and then try stretching, you will find that a true ellipse resists being stretched in any direction. 8. Fig. 6.51 shows a clip from a machine. The clip has been drawn as polylines of width 0.7. Construct the given drawing. 175 R15

R20

Fig. 6.51 Exercise 8

R40

R15

45

80

Ø60

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 91

CHAPTER 7

Dialogs, menus, text

Aims of this chapter The contents of this chapter are intended to: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Describe the variety of dialogs available in AutoCAD 2004. Illustrate the types of menus available in AutoCAD 2004. Introduce the text fonts available in AutoCAD 2004. Show how text styles are set in AutoCAD 2004.

Dialogs Reference has already been made to dialogs and the parts of a dialog have been shown in an illustration on page 2. There are a large number of dialogs in AutoCAD 2004 used for the setting of parameters for a wide range of operations. Some dialogs are complex including as they do the possibility of making a whole range of settings for a variety of features. One such complex dialog is the Save Drawing As dialog opened with a click on Save As . . . in the File drop-down menu. Some of the features in this dialog are shown in Figs 7.1, 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4. Fig. 7.1 shows a drawing file being selected from the file list and the popup menu appearing with a click on the arrow to the right of the Open button of this dialog. Fig. 7.2 shows the tooltips from the icons at the top left-hand corner of the dialog. Also shown in this illustration are the popups from the arrows to the right of Views and Tools in the same area of the dialog. Fig. 7.3 shows the Internet page appearing with a click on the Buzzsaw icon in the Save Drawing As dialog. Note that for this Internet page to appear the Internet must be open in the computer in use. Fig. 7.4 shows the Autodesk website which appears when the Search the Web icon is clicked. Autodesk is the firm which publishes AutoCAD. The Options dialog

Another complex dialog is the Options dialog. Right-click anywhere in the command window (Fig. 7.5), and the Options dialog appears. This dialog (Fig. 7.6) includes a number of sub-dialogs brought to screen with clicks on the tabs in the upper part of the dialog. Fig. 7.6 shows the Display subdialog opened and within this sub-dialog another dialog (Color Options) which appears with a click on the Colors button in the Display sub-dialog. 91

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 92

92

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 7.1 The Save Drawing As dialog

Fig. 7.2 The tooltips associated with the tool icons at the top right-hand corner of the dialog and the popups from Views and Tools

It is advisable to check what can be set in the various sub-dialogs of the Options dialog. Click each tab in turn and examine the sub-dialogs which then appear. Warning windows

Warning windows such as that shown in Fig. 7.7 are not truly dialogs, but such warnings will be seen from time to time. The operator must decide which button to click when they do appear.

Menus Several types of menu will be seen in AutoCAD 2004: Drop-down menus appear when a name is clicked in the menu bar. All of these are shown in Figs 7.8–7.10.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 93

Dialogs, menus, text

93

Fig. 7.3 The Buzzsaw page from the Autodesk website

Fig. 7.4 The page appearing from www.autodesk.com

Sub-menus appear when a name in a drop-down menu is followed by an outward pointing arrow is selected with a click. Right-click menus appear with a right-click in some situations.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 94

94

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 7.5 Opening the Options dialog from the right-click menu in the command window

Fig. 7.6 The Options dialog with the Display sub-dialog and the Color Options sub-dialog

Fig. 7.7 A warning window

Note

When three fullstops (. . .) appear after a name in a drop-down menu, then a left-click on the name brings a dialog to the screen. Some sub-menus from drop-down menus

Fig. 7.11 shows a few of the sub-menus from drop-down menus.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 95

Dialogs, menus, text

95

Fig. 7.8 Drop-down menus

Fig. 7.9 Drop-down menus

Some right-click menus

A right-click menu has already been shown. Fig. 7.5 (page 94) shows the menu appearing with a right-click in the command window. Among other right-click menus are: 1. Toobars list: a right-click in any toolbar on screen bring a menu showing all the available toolbars (Fig. 7.12).

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 96

96

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 7.10 Drop-down menus

Fig. 7.11 A few of the sub-menus from drop-down menus

2. Shortcutmenu: at the command line: Command: enter shortcutmenu right-click Enter new value for SHORTCUTMENU 0: 11 Command:

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 97

Dialogs, menus, text

97

At each right-click when a tool is being used, a menu (Fig. 7.13) appears from which a choice can be made. This menu varies according to the setting of the SHORTCUTMENU variable, which can be set at 0 (no menu), 1, 2, 4, 8 or a sum of these numbers. 3. Pan: see Fig. 2.12 (page 22). 4. Right-clickshift: right-click in the AutoCAD drawing area and at the same time press the shift key of the keyboard and a right-click menu appears (Fig. 7.14). Osnaps can be selected from this menu.

Text A text style has already been added to the A3_template.dwt template (Chapter 3). If thought necessary several other text styles could be included by adding to those already in the Text Style dialog. The method of adding text styles has been described on page 26. A suggested list of styles to be included with the A3_template.dwt is shown in Fig. 7.15. Notes

1. A left-click on the arrow to the right of the font name in the Styles toolbar in the upper part of the AutoCAD 2004 window will bring down a popup list showing the names of the fonts which have been saved with the A3_template.dwt (Fig. 7.16). 2. There are two methods of entering text into a drawing in the AutoCAD 2004 drawing area. First example – Multiline Text (Fig. 7.19)

Fig. 7.12 The toolbars list menu

1. Call the Multiline Text tool with a click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 7.17) or enter t or mt at the command line. The command line shows: Command:_mtext Current text style: “ARIAL” Text height: 8 Specify first corner: pick Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/ Style/Width]: drag to size and pick A rectangular box appears (Fig. 7.18). Drag the corner of the box to the size in which text is to be placed. 2. With the pick of the opposite corner the Text Formatting dialog appears above the box which changes appearance as shown in Fig. 7.19. 3. Type the text to be placed in the AutoCAD drawing area in the box, and when finished click the OK button of the Text Formatting dialog. The text appears placed as required in the AutoCAD window. Note

Fig. 7.13 Shortcut right-click menus

The size of the box in which text has been entered can be adjusted – drag the corner of the rectangle at the top of the box in which text has been entered as indicated in Fig. 7.20. Note that the unit length of the dragged box appears in brackets above the dragged edge.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 98

98

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Second example – Single line text

At the command line: Command: enter dt right-click Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: pick or enter coordinates Specify rotation angle of text 0: right-click Enter text: This is text which is being placed in the AutoCAD 2004 starting at the point as specified Press the Return key of the keyboard Enter text: press the Return key again Command:

Fig. 7.14 The right-click shift menu

Fig. 7.15 The Text Style dialog showing a list of fonts in the Font name popup list

As the text is typed at the keyboard, so it appears in the AutoCAD drawing area, starting at the specified point. If at the second prompt Enter text: further text is typed, it appears below the first line of text. Several lines of text can be entered in this manner. Fig. 7.16 The Popup list appearing with a left-click in the font name field

Fig. 7.17 The Multiline Text tool icon in the Draw toolbar Fig. 7.18 The Multiple Line text size box

Note

Instead of a right-click to go into the next prompt sequence, the Return key of the keyboard must be pressed. Right-clicks have no effect when using this tool.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 99

Dialogs, menus, text

99

Fig. 7.19 The Text Formatting dialog

Fig. 7.20 Dragging the text box to size

Text fonts

Fig. 7.21 The two types of fonts

A large number of text fonts are available in AutoCAD 2004. These are of two types – Windows True Type and AutoCAD SHX fonts. In the Font name popup list of the Text Style dialog, the fonts are shown with one of two icons against their names. Fig. 7.21 shows these two icons. A few examples of the types of fonts are shown in Fig. 7.22 (Windows True Type fonts) and Fig. 7.23 (AutoCAD SHX fonts). A complete list of the fonts available in AutoCAD 2004 is given in Fig. 7.24.

Fig. 7.22 A few of the Windows True Type fonts

Checking spelling There are two methods by which spelling of text can be checked and corrected.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 100

100

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 7.23 A few of the AutoCAD SHX fonts

Fig. 7.24 The text fonts available in AutoCAD 2004

First example – the ddedit tool

1. Using either Multiple Line Text or Dtext (Single Line Text) place some badly spelt text in the AutoCAD window. 2. Either enter ddedit at the command line or from the Modify dropdown menu, pick Object, the Text and finally Edit . . . (Fig. 7.25). The command line shows: Command:_ddedit Select an annotation object or [Undo]: pick the text The Edit Text dialog appears (Fig. 7.26) with the text showing in the Text field of the dialog.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 101

Dialogs, menus, text

101

Fig. 7.25 Selecting Edit . . . from the Modify drop-down menu

Fig. 7.26 The Edit Text dialog

3. Using normal word-processing methods correct the text in the Text field (Fig. 7.27).

Fig. 7.27 The edited text in the Edit Text dialog

4. Left-click the OK button. The corrected text replaces the old wrongly spelt text. Second example – the Check Spelling tool

1. Place some badly spelt text on screen. 2. At the command line enter spell or sp. The command line shows: Command: enter sp right-click Select objects: pick the text Select objects: right-click The Check Spelling dialog appears (Fig. 7.28). In its Suggestions field a word for the first of the wrongly spelt word in the text appears. Click the Change button and the word is corrected. The second wrongly spelt

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 102

102

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 7.28 The Check Spelling dialog

word appears in the Suggestions field. If the word in the Suggestions field is not that which is required, a click can be made on a word from the list below the field bringing that suggestion into the field. Click Change and the change is effected. When all spelling has been corrected an AutoCAD Message window appears (Fig. 7.29). Click its OK button. 3. The dialog disappears and the text should now be spelt correctly. Fig. 7.29 The AutoCAD Message window

The variable TEXTFILL To set this variable at the command line: Command: enter textfill right-click Enter new value for TEXTFILL 1: enter 0 right-click Command: With TEXTFILL set to 0 (OFF) when Windows True Type text is printed or plotted the text filling disappears as shown in Fig. 7.30.

Text symbols When symbols such as %, ° (degrees), Ø (diameter) or are to be included within text, the following need to be entered from the keyboard: For 45% enter 45%%%. For 45° enter 45%%d. For Ø45 enter %%c45. For 450.5 enter 45%%p0.5.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 103

Dialogs, menus, text

103

Fig. 7.30 The Polt Preview for True Type text with TEXTFILL set to 0

However the required symbols do not show on screen until the OK button of the Text Formatting dialog is clicked when working with Multiple Line Text, or the Return key is pressed twice when working with Single Line Text.

Revision tips 1. The Autodesk website www.autodesk.com can be brought to screen from the Select File dialog with a click on the Search the Web icon in the dialog. 2. To get into the Internet from this dialog, the Internet must be running at the time on the computer in use. 3. Setting for the AutoCAD 2004 window can be made from the subdialogs of the Options dialog. 4. The shortcut menu which appears with a right-click when a tool is in operation can be prevented from appearing by setting the variable SHORTCUTMENU to 0. 5. An outward facing arrow appearing after a name in a drop-down menu shows that a sub-menu will appear with a left-click on that name. 6. If three fullstops appear after a name in a drop-down menu (. . .) a left-click on the name will cause a dialog to appear on screen. 7. Use right-click menus where appropriate. 8. The rectangle in which text is entered when in Mtext can be re-sized by dragging at its end line. 9. Two types of font style are available in AutoCAD 2004 – Windows True Type fonts and AutoCAD SHX fonts.

0750661763-ch007 1/12/04 4:53 PM Page 104

104

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

10. Some of the Windows True Type fonts can be entered in Bold, Italic, Bold Italic or Regular style. SHX fonts can only be entered in a single style. 11. Two types of spell checking are available in AutoCAD 2004 – from the Text Edit dialog or from the Check Spelling dialog. 12. When symbols are to be entered within text, use %% as a prefix to d (for degree symbol), c (for diameter symbol), p for plus/minus symbol and another % (for percentage symbol).

Exercises 1. Open the Text Style dialog and reset the fonts used in the AutoCAD drawing area. But do not save the screen – otherwise your template may not appear in a correct fashion. 2. Use the tool Mtext tool to enter some very badly spelt text on screen. Then correct the text using the Edit Text dialog. 3. Now use Dtext for the same purpose. 4. Open the Internet by whatever method the computer uses and have a look at the Autodesk website. 5. Similarly open the Buzzsaw site and examine what it has to offer to an AutoCAD operator. 6. Set the variable SHORTCUTMENU to 8 and check what form of right-click menu appears with right-clicks with a tool in operation.

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 105

CHAPTER 8

Layers and other features

Aims of this chapter 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

To give further information about Layers and their uses. To describe further settings from the Options dialog. To describe the use of Lineweights. To describe uses of the Polyline Edit tool. To introduce the Express tools. To explain Grips.

Layers The setting of layers in the template A3_template.dwt was shown in Chapter 3. Further details are given here. The technical drawing in Fig. 8.1 is shown in Fig. 8.2 as if its layers have been separated and placed in position above each other.

Third angle projection Dimensions are in mm

R15

DO NOT SCALE

10 Ø80

10 10

100

Ø250

Ø60

10 45

Ø230

Ø50

190

HOLE Ø 30 35 deep

25

45

5

Fig. 8.1 A technical drawing constructed in the A3_template.dwt

160

A. STUDENT

GROUP 4A

180

Scale 1:2.5

PULLEY ASSEMBLY 530/A

105

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 106

106

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Layer 0

Layer Hidden

ep

HO

LE

30

35

de

Layer Dimensions

25

0

18 19

Layer Centre

0

40 16

5

0

IA 30 Y5 BL EM SS

Layer Text

A EY LL PU

.5

Fig. 8.2 A pictorial view of the layers on which Fig. 8.1 has been constructed

Sc

GR

OU

ale

1:2

A P4

NT

DE

A.

U ST

Layers in technical drawings produced by using CAD (computer aided drawing/design) software can be regarded in much the same manner as tracings are regarded in technical drawings produced by hand methods. In the same way as certain details when working by hand can be drawn on sheets of tracing paper, which can be placed over the main drawing when required or taken away when not, so layers in CAD drawings can be turned off or back on again and also shown or hidden. Layers in CAD drawings go further in that layers can be frozen, the advantage of which allows speedier regeneration of drawings. Layers can also be locked in which case nothing on that layer can be modified although objects can be added to the layer. Icons in the Layers popup list

Layers are turned off/on, locked/unlocked, frozen/thawed with clicks on the icons in the Layer popup list. The meanings of the icons are shown in tooltips appearing when the cursor is placed over the icon. Fig. 8.3 shows the icons in the popup list together with their tooltips. Limit to number of layers in a drawing

There is no limit to the number of layers which can be set when working in AutoCAD 2004. Some technical drawings, particularly those for architecture and building may require a very large number of layers. Fig. 8.4 shows the Layers Property Manager for a drawing of a five-storey building in which certain services are placed on separate layers for each floor.

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 107

Layers and other features

107

Fig. 8.3 The icons and tooltips in the Layer popup list

Fig. 8.4 A Layer Properties Manager for a drawing with a large number of layers

The Options dialog Some further setting which can be made from the Options dialog are: Screen colours

All the screens shown in illustrations in this book have been based upon the AutoCAD drawing area being white. Many operators prefer a black

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 108

108

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

drawing area. This is because a black area may be easier to look at when working in AutoCAD and also that colours such as yellow and green show more clearly against a black background. To change the colour, in the Options dialog click the Display tab and in the sub-dialog click the Colors . . . button. Then in the Color Options dialog which appears click in the drawing area of the Model tab icon and select Black in the Color popup list (Fig. 8.5).

Fig. 8.5 Selecting a drawing area colour from the Options dialog

Other settings which some operators may wish to adjust are found in the Selection sub-dialog. The pick box size can be adjusted in this sub-dialog by adjusting the slider to the right of the Pick box size area. So also can the colours and size of the Grips Size. More about grips later in this chapter. The various possibilities for settings should be examined in the various sub-dialogs of the Options dialog.

Lineweights In the Properties toolbar click the arrow to the right of the field labelled, By Layer. The popup list which then appears shows a range of lineweights (Fig. 8.6). In Fig. 8.4 on page 107 in the list of layers, a number of layers show Lineweights of varying width. These were selected from the lineweights popup list. If layer 0 is set with a lineweight of say 2.00 mm when a drawing is constructed on layer 0, the width of objects does not show at that width. But when the drawing is plotted or printed then the lineweight takes effect. This is shown in Figs 8.7 and 8.8. Fig. 8.7 shows a drawing

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 109

Layers and other features

109

constructed on layer 0, which has been constructed with a number of different lineweights. It is only when the drawing is plotted or printed that the lineweights show. Fig. 8.8 shows the Plot Preview for the drawing given in Fig. 8.7. Note

Lineweights will not apply to polylines which can have line widths set as they are included in a drawing. But features such as hidden lines, centre lines and dimensions will be printed at the lineweight set in the layers on which such objects have been drawn. Features such as text are obviously not affected by lineweights.

The Polyline Edit tool The tool can be called with a click on Object in the Modify drop-down menu, then in its sub-menu, click Polyline (Fig. 8.9) or by opening up the Modify II toolbar and selecting Edit Polyline (Fig. 8.10). It is easiest to enter pe at the command line. The tool is used for changing polylines in a variety of ways. It can also be used for changing lines, which have to be made into polylines.

Fig. 8.6 The lineweights popup list

Fig. 8.7 A drawing constructed with lineweight 2.00 mm

Fig. 8.8 A Plot Preview of the drawing in Fig. 8.7

Examples – Edit Polyline (Fig. 8.11)

1. Construct a pline rectangle as shown in drawing 1 of Fig. 8.11. Copy the rectangle five times to give rectangles 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 110

110

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 8.9 Selecting Polyline from the Modify drop-down menu

2. At the command line: Command: enter pe right-click PEDIT Select polyline or [Multiple]: pick rectangle 2 Enter an option [Open/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline]: enter w (Width) right-click Specify new width for all segments: 2 [prompts]: right-click Command: 3. Repeat for drawing 3 entering s (Spline) in response to prompts. 4. Repeat for drawing 4 entering e (Edit vertex) and then m (Move).

2

1 Pline of width = 0

3 Pedit to Spline

Pedit to width = 2

Fig. 8.10 Selecting Edit Polyline from the Modify II toolbar 5 4

6 Pedit to Fit

Edit vertex by Move

Pedit to Open

Fig. 8.11 Examples – Edit Polyline

5. Repeat for drawing 5 entering f (Fit) in response to prompts. 6. Repeat with drawing 6 entering o (Open) in response to prompts. The Multiple option of Edit Polyline

When several plines are to be modified with Edit Polyline, enter m in response to: PEDIT Select polyline or [Multiple]: enter m (Multiple) And then any number of plines can be selected one after the other. When the last pline has been picked finish selecting with a right-click then specify the desired change. If when using Pedit, a line is selected before a change to a pline can take place the prompt: Object selected is not a polyline Do you want to change it into one Y: right-click Enter an option [Open/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline]: and the line can now be modified as required.

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 111

Layers and other features

111

Express tools Express tools can be loaded with AutoCAD 2004 as an extra set of advanced tools covering the types of operation which readers of this book are unlikely to need to use. To see the diversity of these tools (if they have been loaded in the computer in use) click Express in the menu bar. To see the variety of tools in the resulting drop-down menu click each name in turn. Two of the sub-menus – Layers and Text are shown in Fig. 8.12.

Fig. 8.12 Two of the sub-menus from the Express drop-down menu

Grips Providing Grips are enabled – see Options dialog and its sub-dialog Selection (Fig. 8.13). Every time an object is selected at any point with a left-click, Grip boxes appear at various points around the object. The size

Fig. 8.13 Enabling Grips in the Options/Selection dialog

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 112

112

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

and the colour of these boxes are dependent upon the settings in the Option/Selection sub-dialog. Fig. 8.14 shows six different objects in an AutoCAD 2004 window and Fig. 8.15 the Grip boxes which appear as each object is selected.

Pline of width = 1

Fig. 8.14 Six objects in an AutoCAD 2004 window

Pline of width = 0.3

Ellipse

Arc

Circle

Line

Fig. 8.15 Grip boxes on the six objects

Examples – Grips (Fig. 8.16)

1. Click any one of the grips, it changes colour and the command line shows: Command: ***STRETCH*** Specify stretch point or [Base point/Copy/Undo/eXit]: 2. Drag the selected grip to another position and the object stretches – drawing 1 of Fig. 8.16. 3. Click a grip on the pline circle. Right-click and a right-click menu (Fig. 8.17) appears. From the menu select Scale and in response the Specify Scale factor prompt enter 0.5. The object scales to half size (drawing 2 of Fig. 8.16).

0750661763-ch008 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 113

Layers and other features

113

Mirror line

1

2 3 Scale

Fig. 8.16 Examples – Grips

Stretch

4 Rotate

Mirror

4. Click a grip on the circle. Right-click and from the menu select Mirror. Pick a mirror line and the circle mirrors (drawing 3 of Fig. 8.16). 5. Now follow this routine again with the ellipse and rotate it through 90°.

Revision tips 1. There is no limit to the number of layers which can be set in a drawing. 2. Layers can be turned on/off, frozen/thawed, locked/unlocked via the icons in the Layers popup list. 3. It is advisable to check the possibilities of settings available in the Options dialog and its sub-dialogs. 4. Lineweight settings are activated when printing/plotting a drawing.

Fig. 8.17 The right-click menu associated with Grips

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 114

CHAPTER 9

The DesignCenter and MDE

Aims of this chapter The purpose of this chapter is to demonstrate the uses of the DesignCenter palette, the Multiple Document Environment (MDE) and the Properties palette.

The AutoCAD DesignCenter Fig. 9.1 The DesignCenter toolbar in the Standard toolbar

Left-click on the DesignCenter tool icon in the Standard toolbar (Fig. 9.1). The DesignCenter palette appears on screen (Fig. 9.2).

Fig. 9.2 The AutoCAD DesignCenter palette

Although the DesignCenter is a palette, it can be treated as a Windows window, in that it can be reduced or enlarged in size by dragging at its corners. It can be moved around the screen by dragging with the cursor in its title bar. The DesignCenter tabs show the following features: Folder List – click the Folders tab and a list appears showing all the folders (and the files they hold) in the computer in use. Open Drawings – click the Open Drawings tab and a list of the drawings within a selected folder appears. 114

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 115

The DesignCenter and MDE

115

History – click the History tab and a history of drawings previously called from the DesignCenter appears. DC Online – click the DC Online tab and, depending upon how the computer is set up for the Internet, a dial-up connection window appears from which the Internet can be entered (Fig. 9.3).

Fig. 9.3 The Dial-up Connection window appearing when the DC Online tab is clicked

Dragging drawings from the DesignCenter

In the Folders List the AutoCAD 2004 files will show the inclusion of symbols for the construction of a number of different form of circuits. Fig. 9.1 shows the AutoCAD 2004 DesignCenter directory from which the Basic Electronics file has been selected. A click on Blocks in the directory shows icons of the symbols in that file. Any one of the icons for the symbols can be dragged into the AutoCAD drawing area where they convert to a drawing of the symbol. The battery symbol is shown in Fig. 9.1 after being dragged from the DesignCenter. First example – DesignCenter (Fig. 9.4)

1. Select the file Chap09/inserts/Fig01.dwg from the Folders List and drag the icon for the drawing into the drawing area. 2. The command line shows: Command-INSERT Enter file name Specify insertion point or [prompts]: pick Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [prompts] 0: right-click

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 116

116

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Enter Y scale factor use X scale factor: right-click Specify rotation angle 0: right-click Command: and the drawing appears in the drawing area (Fig. 9.4).

Fig. 9.4 First example – DesignCenter

Second example – DesignCenter (Fig. 9.6)

This example is taken from drawings of electronics symbols saved in a directory named electrics. 1. Select the directory in the Folders List. The drawings in the directory appear as icons in the preview part of the DesignCenter. 2. Drag selected drawings for the icons into the drawing area. As each is dragged so the command line shows the prompts shown for the first example. Position and, if necessary, rotate each symbol as it is positioned in the drawing area (Fig. 9.5).

Fig. 9.5 The electric symbols after dragging and positioning in the drawing area

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 117

The DesignCenter and MDE

117

3. Click the palette’s Close button and add features to the symbols in the screen to complete the required circuit diagram shown in Fig. 9.6.

6V

Fig. 9.6 Second example – DesignCenter

Previews

Click the Preview icon at the top of the DesignCenter and a preview of the chosen icon appears below the icons showing from a selected directory (Fig. 9.7).

Fig. 9.7 The Preview icon and its result

The Tree View Toggle icon Fig. 9.8 The Tree View Toggle icon

Click the Tree View Toggle icon (Fig. 9.8) and the Folders List disappears leaving a larger area for the icons from a chosen directory or file.

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 118

118

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

The Multiple Document Environment (MDE) Open four drawings one after the other. Then click on Window in the menu bar and from the drop-down menu click Tile Vertically. The four drawings appear as shown in Fig. 9.9. Click in each drawing window in turn and zoom to either Extents or All. A click in any one of the windows makes that drawing the current one.

Fig. 9.9 Four drawings in the MDE

The Properties palette

Fig. 9.10 The Properties icon in the Standard toolbar

Click the Properties icon in the Standard toolbar (Fig. 9.10) and the Properties palette comes to screen. When any object on screen is picked details of its properties will appear in the palette. With a drawing on screen such as that shown in Figs 9.11 and 9.12, pick an object, and its properties are listed in the palette. Fig. 9.11 shows the polyline of the main outline picked and its properties showing in the Properties palette. Fig. 9.12 shows a dimension having been picked and its properties displayed in the palette. The properties of the dimension being much more numerous than those of the polyline, some scrolling of the lists is needed. This can either be by scrolling the scroll bar on the left-hand side of the palette or clicking the double arrows against the list names. Some amendment of properties is possible within the palette. An example is shown in Fig. 9.13 showing the 130 dimensions being overridden to 140 in the Text list of the palette. The new dimension number is entered in the Text override field and the dimension changes in the drawing.

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 119

The DesignCenter and MDE

119

Fig. 9.11 The properties of a polyline showing in the Properties palette

Fig. 9.12 The properties of a dimension showing in the Properties palette

Fig. 9.14 shows the linetype of the ellipse in the drawing changed from Continuous to Hidden2 by a click in the Linetype field which brings down a popup list showing all the linetypes in layers of the drawing. A click on Hidden2 changes the linetype of the ellipse from a Continuous to a Hidden2 type of line.

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 120

120

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 9.15 shows a plot review of the original drawing in Fig. 9.11 after changes have been made in the Properties palette to the top pline (widths), the top dimensions (from 130 to 140) and the ellipse (linetype width and position).

Fig. 9.13 An override in the Properties palette

Fig. 9.14 Changing a linetype in the Properties palette 20

Fig. 9.15 The drawing after changes in the Properties palette

180 25

25

90°

25

25

140

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 121

The DesignCenter and MDE

121

Revision tips 1. The DesignCenter palette can be called from its icon in the Standard toolbar, by entering adcenter at the command line, or from the Tools drop-down menu. 2. The Properties palette can be called from its icon in the Standard toolbar, by entering properties at the command line or from the Tools drop-down menu. 3. The Properties palette is of value for modifying objects in drawings on screen. 4. As many AutoCAD drawings can be shown on screen at any one time as desired through the Multiple Document Environment.

Exercises 1. Construct the drawing in Fig. 9.16 using the Polyline (Width 0), Circle and Ellipse tools. Call the Properties palette and modify the parts as indicated in Fig. 9.17. Save each of your answers to file.

70 130

210 150

Fig. 9.16 Exercise 1 – original drawing

Offset by 10

R5

R20

Outer pline width = 2 Inner pline width = 4

Ellipse now 120 × 60

Circles now radius = 10

Fig. 9.17 Exercise 1

2. Open the DesignCenter palette and in the Folders List select the file: C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2004\Sample\DesignCenter\Basic Electronics From this file pick Blocks, and a number of electronics symbols appear in the DesignCenter.

0750661763-ch009 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 122

122

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Set Limits to 150,105, Zoom All and from the symbols in the DesignCenter construct the electronics circuit given in Fig. 9.18.

Fig. 9.18 Exercise 2

Note

This circuit has no true value as an electronics circuit. 3. If you have saved drawings from working the examples in this book or from answers to exercises, open four of these drawings. Then, using the Multiple Document Environment from the Windows drop-down menu, select Tile Vertically and note the result. Your AutoCAD window should look somewhat like that shown in Fig. 9.19.

Fig. 9.19 Exercise 3

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 123

CHAPTER 10

Types of technical drawings

Aims of this chapter The purpose of this chapter is to show how objects can be fully explained as to size and shape in technical drawings of the types: Orthographic projections in first and third angle. Isometric drawings.

Orthographic projection Orthographic projection is a method of describing objects in technical drawings. The basic idea of this form of technical drawing is to show views of the object being described as seen from a variety of directions. Two methods of this form of projection are first angle projection and third angle projection. The idea behind these two ‘angles’ is shown in Fig. 10.1. The object being described is placed in position in two planes, one horizontal, the other vertical, and crossing at right angles. The object is viewed from its front and from above and, with the insertion of a second vertical plane, viewed from one side. The three viewing directions of the first angle projection are shown in Fig. 10.2. What is seen from these viewing directions is drawn on the horizontal and vertical planes. Perspective is ignored.

Look from this direction to see the plan

Vertical plane (V.P.)

Horizontal plane (H.P.) H.P.

First angle Third angle

Fig. 10.1 The two orthographic projection planes

Look from this direction to see the front view

V.P.

123

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 124

124

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Look from this direction to see the plane First vertical plane (V.P.)

Second vertical plane (V.P.)

Look from this direction to see the front view

Look from this direction to see the end view

Fig. 10.2 The three viewing directions used in first angle projection

Horizontal plane (H.P.)

The three planes are revolved so as to all lie in the same plane with the result that the views as drawn on the planes are seen as shown in Fig. 10.3. The planes are regarded as being invisible and so are not seen in the resulting first angle projection.

Front view on first vertical plane

Fig. 10.3 The resulting first angle projection

End view on second vertical plane

Plan on horizontal plane

Number of views in an orthographic projection

The number of views included in an orthographic projection depends upon the complexity of the object(s) being described. Objects constructed from flat sheets require only a single view. Other objects may require two views. In general most objects can be described in three views, but more complicated objects may require a larger number of views. Fig. 10.4 shows six views in a first angle orthographic projection.

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 125

Types of technical drawings

125

Plan from below FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION

End view seen from the right

End view seen from the left

Rear view

Fig. 10.4 A six-view first angle orthographic projection

Plan from above

Auxiliary views

Views at an angle other than horizontal or vertical can be included in an orthographic projection. Fig. 10.5 shows a bracket with an elliptical hole at right angles to the sloping face of the bracket. In order to draw a view which shows the exact shape of the hole, a view at right angles to the sloping face is of value. Such an auxiliary view is shown in Fig. 10.6. This view is in first angle projection. Direction of viewing

Fig. 10.5 A pictorial view of the bracket

Fig. 10.6 An auxiliary view showing the shape of the hole

Auxiliary view

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 126

126

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Third angle projection

A three-view third angle projection of the object shown in first angle in Fig. 10.3 is given in Fig. 10.7.

Plan on horizontal plane

End view on second vertical plane

Front view on first vertical plane

Fig. 10.7 A three-view third angle orthographic projection

Rules for orthographic projections

1. In first angle projection a plan is drawn below the front view. 2. In first angle projection end views are drawn on the opposite sides of the front view from which the view is seen. 3. In third angle projection a plan is drawn above the front view. 4. In third angle projection end views are drawn on the same side of the front view from which the view is seen. 5. In general, views are not labelled as such. 6. In auxiliary views the projections are made onto an imaginary plane at right angles to the direction of viewing. Lines in technical drawings

Fig. 10.8 The lineweight popup list

When constructing technical drawings ‘by hand’ it is common practice to use lines of different widths. This method can be carried over to drawings constructed using AutoCAD 2004. Lines can either be drawn using the Polyline tool when line widths are set as the tool is used, or using the Line tool with lines set to widths from the lineweight popup list (Fig. 10.8). See also page 109 noting the lineweight only takes effect when plotting or printing. Lines constructing using the Line tool can also be modified to any line width using the Pedit tool. In the drawings in this book which have been constructed on our A3_template, lines have usually been as shown in Fig. 10.9. Lines described as Thin lines in Fig. 10.9 are those used in dimensions, construction lines, projection lines, etc. In building drawings lines thicker than those shown in Fig. 10.9 are often used to differentiate between different building details such as walls and partitions.

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 127

Types of technical drawings

127

Outline line – 0.7 wide Thin line – 0 wide Hidden detail – 0 wide Centre line – 0 wide

Fig. 10.9 Lines as used in this book

Break line – 0 wide

Examples of orthographic projections

Two examples of orthographic projections are given in Figs 10.10 and 10.11. The third angle projection (Fig. 10.10) shows a simple assembly

20

Ø40

24 12

60

Ø25

R7.5 Ø24 R24

M7.5

Holes Ø15

80 16 16

28

Washer %515x2

Fig. 10.10 A third angle orthographic projection

A.Reader Date: 24/09/2005 Scale 1:1 Third angle proj

112

Dimensions in millimetres

Haulage Bracket and Pin

drawing. The first angle projection (Fig. 10.11) shows a single object in three views.

Isometric projection When constructing isometric drawings it must be remembered that this form of pictorial drawing is not a true 3D (three-dimensional) form of drawing (see Chapters 16–21). Isometric drawings are constructed in a 2D screen. The AutoCAD 2004 drawing area can be prepared for the construction of isometric drawing as follows:

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 128

128

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

1. Open the A3_template. 2. At the command line: Command: enter snap right-click Specify snap spacing or [ON/OFF/Aspect/Style/Type] 5: enter s (Style) right-click Enter grid snap style [Standard/Isometric]: enter i (Isometric) rightclick Specify vertical spacing 5: right-click Command: and the drawing area changes showing the cursor hairs at an isometric angle (Fig. 10.12). Dimensions in millimetres 10

R15

10

Hole Ø15

30

70

40

Hole Ø30

R15

Holes Ø15 Ø40

60

Ø60 Holes Ø15

50

Tapped M10 50

Fig. 10.11 A first angle orthographic projection

90

Name: M.Y.Name Scale: 1:1 Date: 30/05/05

First angle projection

Title: CASTING 70/B45

Isoplanes

The cursor hair lines in Fig. 10.12 are in an Isoplane Top position. The isoplanes can be changed either by pressing the function key F5 or the two keys CtrlE. These two keying alternatives toggle the cursor hair lines between Isoplane Top, Isoplane Right and Isoplane Left. Fig. 10.13 shows the effect of these toggles when constructing isometric ‘squares’. The Ellipse tool is used for constructing isometric ‘circles’ by calling the tool as follows: Command:_ellipse Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]: enter i (Isocircle) right-click Specify center of isocircle: pick or enter coordinates Specify radius of isocircle or [Diameter]: enter the radius Command: and the isocircle is constructed depending upon which of the isoplane is current at the time. Fig. 10.14 shows isocircles (which are ellipses) in each of the three isoplanes.

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 129

Types of technical drawings

Fig. 10.12 The AutoCAD 2004 window set for isometric drawing Isoplane left

Isoplane right

Isoplane top

Fig. 10.13 ‘Squares’ drawn in the three isoplanes Isoplane left

Isoplane right

Isoplane top

Fig. 10.14 Isocircles drawn in the three isoplanes

129

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 130

130

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Examples of isometric drawings First example (Fig. 10.17)

20

70

90

120

90

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Set Snap to Isometric. Toggle with F5 to Isoplane Right. 3. Using the Polyline tool construct the outline given in Fig. 10.15. If Ortho is on (F8 key or click ORTHO button in status bar) the outline will be easier to construct. The front view on the left of the isometric drawing given in Fig. 10.15 shows the dimensions for the outline.

Fig. 10.15 First example – Isometric drawing – first stage

4. Toggle to Isoplane Left and add lines from each corner of the outline as shown in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 10.16. 5. Toggle back to Isoplane Right and add plines as shown in the righthand drawing of Fig. 10.16. 6. Call the Ellipse tool and with the isoplane in Top, construct an isocircle of radius 30 central to the ‘horizontal’ part of the drawing.

Fig. 10.16 First example – Isometric drawing – second stage

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 131

Types of technical drawings

131

7. With Copy Objects copy the isocircle downwards 20 units. 8. With Trim, trim unwanted parts of the lower isocircle. 9. In Isoplane Right construct isocircles of radius 20 in both the upright parts of the drawing and copy them backwards by 20 units. 10. With Trim, trim unwanted parts of these isocircles. Fig. 10.17 shows the result.

Fig. 10.17 First example – Isometric drawing

Second example (drawing 14 of Fig. 10.22)

This, more advanced example, shows the construction of an isometric drawing of the stand shown in the three-view first angle projection given in Fig. 10.18. The numbered items below refer to numbers against the isometric drawings Figs 10.19–10.22. Dimensions of the drawings are taken from the drawing in Fig. 10.18.

50 10

10

R50

10

R60

80

Fig. 10.18 Second example – Isometric drawing – first angle drawing

R25

Holes Ø20

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 132

132

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Open the A3_template.dwt. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Fig. 10.19. In Isoplane Left construct two isocircles. Draw a line through the diameters of the isocircles. With Trim, trim the two isocircles into semi-isocircles. With Trim, trim the line. Add the end pieces as shown. With Copy, copy the upper semi-isocircle and the end pieces 50 units backwards. Trim unwanted parts and add lines to the end pieces as shown. 2

1

4

3

6

5

Fig. 10.19 Second example – Isometric drawing – stages 1–6

7. Fig. 10.20. In Isoplane Top construct two isocircles of radius 25 central to the end flanges as shown. 8. Trim away unwanted parts as shown. 7

9

Fig. 10.20 Second example – Isometric drawing – stages 7–10

8

10

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 133

Types of technical drawings

133

9. In Isoplane Right and with Copy Object copy the resulting semiisocircles 10 units vertically downwards. 10. Add vertical lines at the ends of the flanges and trim unwanted parts. Use the Osnap nearest to ensure the lines are in correct positions. 11. Fig. 10.21. In Isoplane Top add isocircles of radius 10 central to the end flanges. Copy the two isocircles 10 units downwards and trim unwanted parts. 12. Repeat the stages 1–12 in the upside down position. 11

12

Fig. 10.21 Second example – Isometric drawing – stages 11–12

13. Fig. 10.22. Move the drawing stage 12 to its correct position in relation to the upper part already drawn. Some details will require to be trimmed away. 14. Add the base of the stand. The isometric drawing is completed.

13

14

Fig. 10.22 Second example – Isometric drawing – stages 13–14

Revision tips 1. Orthographic projections may be in first or third angle. 2. In first angle, views are placed on the side of the front view away from the direction of viewing. 3. In third angle, projection views are placed on the side of the front view nearest to the direction of viewing.

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 134

134

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

4. The vertical and horizontal planes on which views are placed are imaginary. 5. As many views are drawn in orthographic projection as are need to describe the object(s) being drawn as clearly as possible. 6. Auxiliary views in orthographic projection are placed on imaginary planes at angles other than vertical or horizontal. 7. Isometric projection is a 2D pictorial method of describing objects. 8. Isoplanes are toggled either by pressing the F5 key or the CtrlE keys. 9. In order to draw isometric ‘circles’ use the Ellipse tool with its i (Isocircle) prompt.

Exercises 1. Fig. 10.23 is an isometric drawing of the stand shown in the three-view orthographic drawing in Fig. 10.24. Construct a full size three-view third angle projection of the stand. Do not include any of the dimensions. Include suitable borderlines and title block with your drawing. Construct a full size isometric drawing of the stand.

Hole Ø10

Dimensions in millimetres

Ø20 Hole Ø40

15

60

Fig. 10.23 Exercise 1 – an isometric view of the object to be drawn

Square 110

Holes Ø10

Square 60

R10

Fig. 10.24 Exercise 1

Name:

Scale:

Date:

Title

2. Construct a full size isometric drawing of the stand shown in the threeview first angle projection in Fig. 10.25. 3. Fig. 10.26 is an isometric drawing of the support shown in the threeview orthographic projection in Fig. 10.27. Construct a three-view full size third angle projection of the support. Do not include the dimensions. Construct an isometric drawing of the support.

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 135

Types of technical drawings 20

135

80

30

20

70

30

70

30

Fig. 10.25 Exercise 2

160

40 40

40

15

45

110

R15

15

R5 100

90 Hole Ø30

Fig. 10.26 Exercise 3 – an isometric drawing All chamfers 15 × 15

Fig. 10.27 Exercise 3

60

4. Construct a scale 1:1 three-view third angle projection of the change switch shown in an isometric drawing (Fig. 10.28) and a two-view first angle drawing (Fig. 10.29). Do not include the dimensions. 5. Fig. 10.30 shows an isometric drawing of a support bracket. Construct a three-view first angle projection of the bracket. Do not add its dimensions. Construct an isometric drawing of the bracket as viewed from its right-hand side. 6. Construct a full size three-view first angle projection of the garden table shown in Fig. 10.31. Do not attempt including any of the dimensions. 7. Fig. 10.32 shows a pictorial view of an adjustable support device. Construct a three-view first angle projection of the support, with the two rods in position. Do not include dimensions.

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 136

136

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

8. Fig. 10.33 shows a two-view first angle projection of a clamping device. The screw holding the clamp onto a cylinder is shown in an enlarged view. Copy the given two views and add a plan. Work in either first or third angle at your own choice. Do not include any dimensions. 25

75

10 R10

30

100

135

5

R5 25

Fig. 10.28 Exercise 4 – an isometric drawing

5

Fig. 10.29 Exercise 4

Ø30 30

Ø50

20

150

11 0

0 15

Ho les Ø4 0

Fig. 10.30 Exercise 5 Each slat of top is: 1500 mm long by 100 mm × 35 mm Legs are: 750 mm long by 90 mm × 50 mm

Fig. 10.31 Exercise 6

Seat slats are: 1500 mm long by 50 mm × 35 mm

0750661763-ch010 1/12/04 4:54 PM Page 137

Types of technical drawings

Both the base and the support piece are by 120 mm deep and 100 mm high and each bar is 45 mm by 8 mm

Fig. 10.32 Exercise 7

Ø20 Ø30

15

Ø140 Ø120

5

M10

25

15

Ø110

40 50

Fig. 10.33 Exercise 8

Enlarged view of screw

137

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 138

CHAPTER 11

Hatching

Aims of this chapter The aims of this chapter are to introduce hatching in its various forms: 1. 2. 3. 4.

To show a sample of the variety of hatching patterns. To demonstrate hatching from the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog. To demonstrate hatching from the command line. To give examples of hatching in sectional views in technical drawings.

The Hatch tool

Fig. 11.1 The Hatch tool icon in the Draw toolbar

The Hatch tool can be called from its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 11.1) or by entering h at the command line. When the tool is called, the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog comes on the screen. The parts of the Hatch Boundary and Fill dialog

Call the Hatch tool and the dialog appears on screen (Fig. 11.2). Left-click in the Swatch field and the Hatch Pattern Palette sub-dialog comes to screen. In this sub-dialog are four tabs. Left-click the ANSI tab and the sub-dialog shows a number of ANSI hatch patterns in the ANSI palette. Other hatch palettes

Left-click the ISO tab of the Hatch Pattern Palette and the palette (Fig. 11.3) appears. Left-click the Other Defined tab and its palette appears (Fig. 11.4). The final palette (Custom) would contain hatch patterns defined by the operator of the software. Other sub-dialogs

In the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog left-click the Advanced tab. The sub-dialog which appears is shown in Fig. 11.5. Then left-click the Gradient tab. Its sub-dialog appears. Click the button to the right of the Color 2 field and a Select Color dialog appears from which a colour can be chosen (Fig. 11.6). 138

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 139

Hatching

139

Fig. 11.2 The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog and the ANSI hatch palette

Fig. 11.3 The ISO hatch palette

Examples of hatching

Fig. 11.7 shows a number of different hatch patterns at a variety of angles and scales.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 140

140

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 11.4 The Other Defined hatch palettes

Fig. 11.5 The Advanced sub-dialog

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 141

Hatching

141

Fig. 11.6 The Gradient subdialog with the Select Color dialog

ANSI31 Angle 0 Scale 30

AR-HBONE Angle 0 Scale 2

ANSI37 Angle 0 Scale 30

BOX Angle 45 Scale 20

ISO04W100 Angle 0 Scale 1

ESCHER Angle 0 Scale 20

Advanced Normal

Fig. 11.7 Examples of a variety of hatch patterns

BRICK Angle 0 Scale 20

Gradient One color

First set of examples – Hatch (Fig. 11.9)

1. Construct the drawing 1 of Fig. 11.9 and make two copies. 2. Call the Hatch tool and in the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog click in the Swatch field and select from the Other Predefined palette the pattern HONEY. Click the palette’s OK button. 3. Click the Advanced tab and in the Normal diagram ensure its radio button is on (dot in circle). 4. Click the Hatch tab and set Angle to 0 and Scale to 30.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 142

142

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 11.8 The Select Objects button of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog

5. Click the Select Objects button and when the dialog disappears click the rectangle, the ellipse and the circle of drawing 2, followed by a right-click. 6. The dialog reappears. Click its Preview button. The dialog again disappears showing the hatching of the drawing. If the hatching is as required right-click. The dialog reappears. Click its OK button. 7. If the hatching is not as required, right-click and in the dialog make any necessary changes to the hatch pattern, its angle and scale. 8. Repeat item 8 if necessary until satisfied. 9. Call Hatch again, click the Advanced tab again and in the sub-dialog click the radio button of the Outer diagram. 10. Click the Hatch tab and again in the Swatch field select the pattern STARS. Set its Angle to 0 and its Scale to 30. 11. Click the Select Objects button (Fig. 11.8) and when the dialog disappears click the rectangle, ellipse and circle of drawing 3. 12. Back in the dialog click Preview and adjust the angle and scale if necessary. 13. In drawing 4, with Advanced set to Ignore hatch with the pattern ANSI134 set to an Angle of 90 and Scale of 30. The result of these three Hatch examples is shown in Fig. 11.9.

1

170 130

110 70

2

3

Ø5

0

4

Fig. 11.9 First set of examples – Hatch

Second example – Hatch (Fig. 11.11)

1. Construct the drawing given in Fig. 11.11 to any suitable dimensions. 2. Call the Hatch tool and in the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog, set the hatch pattern to ANSI31 of Angle 0 and Scale 30. 3. Click the Pick Points button (Fig. 11.10). The dialog disappears. 4. Left-click in each of the points shown in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 11.11, followed by a right-click. The dialog reappears.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 143

Hatching

143

5. Click its Preview button, the drawing reappears. Check whether the hatching is suitable. Right-click and in the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog which reappears either click its OK button if satisfied with the hatching, or make changes to the pattern, angle and scale as required.

Pick points

Fig. 11.10 The Pick Points button of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog

Fig. 11.11 Second example – Hatch

Pick points

Third example – Hatch (Fig. 11.16)

1. Open the template A3_template.dwt. 2. In the Layer Properties Manager amend the layers to those shown in Fig. 11.12.

Fig. 11.12 Third example – Hatch – the revised Layer Properties Manager

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

The drawing given in Fig. 11.13 was constructed in Layer 0. Make layer Construction the current layer. On layer Construction construct the outlines shown in Fig. 11.14. Make the layer HATCH the current layer. Turn layer 0 off. Using hatch patterns BRICK, ANGLE and CONCRETE hatch as shown in Fig. 11.15. 8. Make the layer 0 the current layer and turn layer CONSTRUCTION off. Fig. 11.16 shows the resulting drawing. Example – Associative hatching (Fig. 11.19)

1. The drawing in Fig. 11.18 has been constructed and the roof hatched using the ANGLE pattern and the wall hatched with AR-B816.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 144

144

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 11.13 Third example – Hatch – the drawing on Layer 0

Fig. 11.14 Third example – Hatch – the drawing on Layer CONSTRUCTION

Fig. 11.15 Third example – Hatch – the hatching on Layer HATCH

2. Make sure the radio button to the left of Associative in the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog is filled with a dot (it is then ON) – Fig. 11.17. 3. Call the Move tool and using the Window prompt, move the windows and door in Fig. 11.18 as shown in Fig. 11.19. As each part is moved so the hatching adjusts to the new positions of the window and door.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 145

Hatching

Fig. 11.16 Third example – Hatch

Fig. 11.17 Example – Associative hatching – its radio button set on

Fig. 11.18 Example – Associative hatching – before using Move

Fig. 11.19 Example – Associative hatching – after moving windows and door

145

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 146

146

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Hatching from the command line

To hatch from the command line: Command: enter hatch right-click Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined]: ANSI31: enter ? right-click and the AutoCAD Text Window (Fig. 11.20) appears showing all the patterns with the materials each represents. This window has the advantage that, if the material for which a pattern exists is not known, it can be chosen from the text window. Once a pattern has been identified, its name can be entered in response to: Command: enter hatch right-click Enter a pattern name or [prompts]: enter brick right-click Specify a scale for the pattern 1.0000: 20 Specify an angle for the pattern 0: right-click Select objects to define hatch boundary or direct hatch: pick Select objects: pick and pick objects as necessary until all objects forming the boundary have been selected.

Fig. 11.20 The AutoCAD Text Window showing patterns with their identities

The hatching of sections in technical drawings

Two examples of sectional views are given (Figs 11.21, 11.22, 11.33). In sectional views an imaginary cut is taken through the objects being sectioned. The end line of the section plane making the imagined cut may be shown by a section plane line as in Fig. 11.22. The arrows at top and bottom of the section plane show the direction of viewing to see the cut surface. The section shows the cut surface with those parts which have been cut through hatched.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 147

Hatching

147

In engineering drawings details such as webs, pins, bolts, screws, etc. are not hatched but are shown by outside views. See the first example in Fig. 11.22. The hatching in such views is often the ANSI31 pattern. The second example in Fig. 11.23 shows a sectional view through a window in a double cavity wall. This section involves a variety of hatch patterns. A Web (outside view)

Fig. 11.21 First example – sectional views – an isometric drawing of the bracket and pin Pick points

Fig. 11.22 Sectional view – first example – a sectional end view through the bracket and pin

Pick points

A-A Pin (outside view)

Reinforced concrete

A

Brickwork

Window frame

Window glass

Inner sill

Outer sill

Plaster

Fig. 11.23 A section through a double cavity wall and window

Brickwork Inner wall

Revision tips 1. There are two methods by which the Hatch tool can be used, the first is by clicking the Hatch tool icon in the Draw toolbar (or enter h at the command line) to bring the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog to screen. The second is by entering hatch at the command line. The first is probably the better method unless the operator wishes to find a hatch pattern name for a material.

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 148

148

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

2. Select patterns from three pattern palettes – ANSI, ISO, Other Predefined or – if the operator has constructed his/her own hatch patterns from Custom. 3. Use Preview to check whether the hatch pattern, its angle and scale are as wished before clicking the OK button of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog. 4. Experiment with both the Advanced and the Gradient methods of hatching. Gradient colour hatching is new to AutoCAD 2004. 5. Usually when hatching drawings the Pick Points method of selecting areas to be hatched will be used, but the Select Objects bounding the area may on occasions have to be used. 6. In engineering technical drawings when hatching sectional views items such as screws, bolts, spindles, webs, ribs and similar parts should be shown as outside views within the sectional view. 7. When hatching some types of drawing it may be necessary to add new layers for hatch boundaries and hatching.

Exercises 1. Fig. 11.24 is a two-view projection of a pulley. Construct the given front view (the left-hand of the two views) and from this construct a sectional view from the plane A-A.

A

30

Hole Ø25

160

60

Hole Ø40

90°

Ø30

Ø120 Ø80

Slots 10 wide

Hole Ø25

2.5

80 A

Fig. 11.24 Exercise 1

2. Construct a copy of the drawing in Fig. 11.25 working to any sizes thought suitable. The text is Times New Roman (bold).

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 149

Hatching

149

AutoCAD 2004 Fig. 11.25 Exercise 2

3. Fig. 11.26 is a design for an anniversary card. Construct to any suitable size a copy of the card, or design another of a similar design. 4. Working to any suitable dimensions construct a copy of the drawing in Fig. 11.27.

Happy Anniversary

Fig. 11.26 Exercise 3

Fig. 11.27 Exercise 4

0750661763-ch011 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 150

150

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

5. Fig. 11.28 shows the front view of a house. Either copy the given drawing, or construct a front view of a similar nature to that shown.

Fig. 11.28 Exercise 5

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 151

CHAPTER 12

Dimensioning

Aims of this chapter The aims of this chapter are to introduce methods of dimensioning drawings: 1. To introduce the Dimension toolbar and to give examples of using tools from the toolbar. 2. To give examples of dimensions added to drawings from the command line. 3. To explain amendments needed in the Dimension Style Manager when including decimals to dimensions. 4. To give examples of linear tolerances in dimensions. 5. To give examples of geometrical tolerances in dimensions.

The Dimension toolbar Fig. 12.1 shows the tool icons in the Dimension toolbar in our A3_template. To bring the toolbar on screen right-click in any toolbar and select Dimension from the resulting right-click menu. Note the template name in the Dim Style Control field. Note also a click in this field brings down a popup list showing all dim styles in the Dimension Style Manager.

Fig. 12.1 The Dimension toolbar

Examples of adding dimensions using the tools First example – Linear Dimension (Fig. 12.3)

Fig. 12.2 The Linear Dimension tool icon from the Dimension toolbar

1. Construct a simple outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.3. 2. Left-click the Linear Dimension tool icon (Fig. 12.2). The command line shows: Command:_dimlinear Specify first extension line origin or Select object: pick Specify second extension line origin: pick Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Horizontal/Vertical/ Rotate]: pick 151

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 152

152

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Dimension text 170 Command: The result is shown in the 170 dimension of Fig. 12.3.

170

Second extension line origin

Object to dimension

65

First extension line origin

Dimension line location

Fig. 12.3 First example – Linear Dimension

Second example – Linear Dimension (Fig. 12.3)

Click the Linear Dimension tool icon again. The command line shows: Command:_dimlinear Specify first extension line origin or Select object: right-click Specify object to dimension: pick Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Horizontal/Vertical/ Rotate]: pick Dimension text 65 Command: The result is shown in the 65 dimension of Fig. 12.3. Third example – Aligned dimension (Fig. 12.5)

Fig. 12.4 The Aligned Dimension tool icon from the Dimension toolbar

1. Construct an outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.5. 2. Click the Aligned Dimension tool icon (Fig. 12.4). The command line will show almost the same prompts as for the Linear Dimension tool. The prompts are different, but the only real difference being that one line shows: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Leaving out the: Horizontal/Vertical/Rotate part of the Linear Dimension prompt line. Two Angular Dimensions are given in Fig. 12.5. Fourth example – Ordinate Dimension (Fig. 12.7)

1. Construct an outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.7. 2. Click the Ordinate Dimension tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 12.6). The command line shows:

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 153

Dimensioning

153

76 64

Fig. 12.5 Third example – Aligned Dimension

Command:_dimordinate Specify feature location: pick Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: pick Dimension text 255 Command:

255

115

Fig. 12.7 shows the coordinates of every point on the outline as identified by using this tool. Thus the coordinates of the top right-hand corner of the outline is 255,255.

80

Fig. 12.6 The Ordinate Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

255

255 230

Leader endpoint

255

165 80

165

Fig. 12.7 Fourth example – Ordinate Dimension

Feature location

Fifth example – Radius/Diameter Dimensions (Fig. 12.9)

Fig. 12.8 The Radius Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

1. Construct an outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.9. 2. Click the Radius Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar (Fig. 12.8). The command line shows: Command:_dimradius Select arc or circle: pick Dimension text 35 Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: pick Command: The prompts for the Diameter Dimension tool are the same as for Radius Dimension tool. Fig. 12.9 shows the dimensioning of arcs and circles using the Radius Dimension and Diameter Dimension tools.

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 154

154

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Specify arc or circle

O40

R35

Fig. 12.9 Fifth example – Radius Dimension and Diameter Dimension

R45

Dimension line location

O50

Sixth example – Angular Dimension (Fig. 12.11)

1. Construct an outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.11. 2. Click the Angular Dimension tool icon (Fig. 12.10). The command line shows: Command:_dimangular Select arc, circle, line or specify vertex: pick Select second line: pick

Fig. 12.10 The Angular Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: pick Dimension 135 Command: Fig. 12.11 shows three angular dimensions added to the outline using the tool. Arc, Circle, Line location Second line 135

°

146

°

Dimension arc location

Fig. 12.11 Sixth example – Angular Dimension

90°

Seventh example – Quick Dimension (Fig. 12.13)

1. Construct an outline similar to that given in Fig. 12.13. 2. Click the Quick Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar (Fig. 12.12). The command line shows: Command:_qdim Associative geometry Endpoint

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 155

Dimensioning

155

Fig. 12.12 The Quick Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

Select geometry to dimension: pick 80 line 1 found Select geometry to dimension: pick the 75 line 1 found 2 total Select geometry to dimension: pick the 35 line 1 found 2 total Select geometry to dimension: pick the 75 line 1 found 3 total Select geometry to dimension: pick the 65 line 1 found 3 total [Continuous/Staggered/Baseline/Ordinate/Radius/Diameter/datum Point/Edit/seTtings]: enter c (Continuous) right-click Specify dimension line position or [prompts]: pick Command: The result is shown in Fig. 12.13. 75

35

65

65

80

Fig. 12.13 Seventh example – Quick Dimension

Note

Quick Dimension is a suitable tool for the type of dimensioning shown in Fig. 12.13. Eighth example – Baseline Dimension (Fig. 12.17)

Fig. 12.14 The Dimension Style tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

1. Construct an outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.17 and with the Linear Dimension tool add the uppermost 20 dimension. 2. Open the Dimension Style Manager with a click on the Dimension Style tool icon (Fig. 12.14). When the dialog appears, in its Lines and Arrows sub-dialog set Baseline spacing to 12 (Fig. 12.15). 3. Click the Baseline Dimension tool icon (Fig. 12.16). The command line shows: Command:_dimbaseline Select base dimension: pick the 20 dimension Specify a second extension line origin: pick Dimension text 20 Specify a second extension line origin: pick

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 156

156

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 12.15 Setting Baseline spacing in the Dimension Style Manager

and the dimensions appear as shown in Fig. 12.17.

130

Extension line origins

90

60

20

20

Fig. 12.16 The Baseline Dimension tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

Dimension text 60 Specify a second extension line origin: pick Dimension text 90 Specify a second extension line origin: pick Dimension text 130 Specify a second extension line origin: right-click Command:

Fig. 12.17 Eighth example – Baseline Dimension

Ninth example – Quick Leader (Fig. 12.20)

1. Construct a front view of a bolt such as that shown in Fig. 12.20. 2. Click the Quick Leader tool icon (Fig. 12.18). The command line shows: Command:_qleader Specify first leader point or [Settings] settings: right-click

Fig. 12.18 The Quick Leader tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

and the Leader Settings dialog appears (Fig. 12.19). Settings can be made in this dialog, the most interesting settings being the Arrowheads in the Leader Line and Arrow sub-dialog. Fig. 12.19 shows the variety possible. In general dimension leaders will have the characteristics of the settings in the template in use. To place a leader:

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 157

Dimensioning

157

Fig. 12.19 The popup list showing the variety of arrowheads in the Leader Settings dialog

Command:_qleader Specify first leader point or [Settings] settings: pick Specify next point: pick Specify next point: right-click Enter first line of annotation (Mtext): right-click and the Text Formatting dialog appears in which text can be entered. In this example M40 was entered followed by a click on the dialog’s OK button. Command: The result is shown in Fig. 12.20. Tenth example – Geometrical Tolerance (Fig. 12.25) M40

Fig. 12.20 Ninth example – Quick Leader

1. Construct the two rectangles with circles as in Fig. 12.25. 2. Add dimensions to the two circles. 3. Click the Tolerance tool icon (Fig. 12.21). The Geometrical Tolerance dialog (Fig. 12.22) appears. 4. In the dialog click the black box under Sym. The Symbol dialog (Fig. 12.22) appears. In the dialog click the top left-hand square (see Fig. 12.23).

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 158

158

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 12.21 The Tolerance tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

Fig. 12.22 The Geometrical Tolerance and Symbol dialogs

5. Still in the dialog click the right-hand black square under Tolerance 1. The Material Condition dialog appears (Fig. 12.23). Click L. 6. Enter 0.05 in the Tolerance 1 field (Fig. 12.24), followed by a Click on the dialog’s OK button. The geometrical tolerance appears. Move it to a position under the R10 dimension. 7. Now add a geometrical tolerance to the 15 dimension as shown in Fig. 12.25. The meanings of the symbols Fig. 12.23 The Material Condition dialog

The Material Condition letters have the following meanings: M – maximum amount of material. L – least amount of material. S – size within the limits. Fig. 12.26 shows the meanings of the geometrical symbols. Eleventh example – Linear tolerances (Fig. 12.28)

Fig. 12.24 Enter 0.05 in the Tolerance 1 field

1. Open the Dimension Style Manager and click the Tolerances tab. In the sub-dialog which appears make amendments as shown in Fig. 12.27: Method – Deviation. Precision – 0.00. Upper value – 0.05. Lower value – 0.05.

R15 O0.05 S

Fig. 12.25 Tenth example – Geometrical tolerances

R10

O0.25 L

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 159

Dimensioning

Straight

Flat

Profile (of a surface)

Fig. 12.26 The meanings of the symbols

Circular

Parallel

Cylindrical Profile (of a line)

Perpendicular

Runout (total)

Angular

159

Symmetry

Concentric Position

Runout (circular)

Fig. 12.27 Amendments to the Tolerances sub-dialog of the Dimension Style manager

Scaling for height – 0.7. Vertical position – Middle. Then Click the Set Current button in the main dialog, followed by a click on its Close button. 2. Construct and dimension the drawing in Fig. 12.28 to complete this example. Eleventh example – Dimension Edit (Fig. 12.30)

1. Construct a rectangle (upper drawing of Fig. 12.30) and add its dimensions. 2. Call Edit Dimension (Fig. 12.29). 3. Using the Rotate prompt edit the 210 dimension and the 90 dimension as shown in Fig. 12.30 (lower drawing).

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 160

160

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

185+0.05 –0.05

210+0.05 –0.05

+0.05 O 50–0.05

135

° +0° –0°

Fig. 12.28 Eleventh example – Linear Tolerances

R35+0.05 –0.05

Twelfth example – Dimension Text Edit (Fig. 12.32)

210

90

Fig. 12.29 The Dimension Edit tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

1. Recall the drawing in Fig. 12.30. 2. Click the Dimension Text Edit tool icon (Fig. 12.31). 3. Using the Right and Left prompts edit the dimensions as shown in Fig. 12.32.

90

21 0

Dimension set to Rotate 45°

Dimension set to Oblique 30°

Fig. 12.30 Eleventh example – Dimension Edit

Dimensioning from the command line

Dimension can be added to drawings from the command line without using the tools from the Dimension toolbar. When dimensioning from the command line, the following abbreviations are used: hor – horizontal dimension. ve – vertical dimension.

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 161

Dimensioning

Fig. 12.31 The Dimension Text Edit tool icon in the Dimension toolbar

161

al – aligned dimension. l – leader dimension. an – angular dimension. ra – radius dimension. di – diameter dimension. ba – baseline dimension. co – continue dimension. te – text edit dimension. cen – centre mark. ddim – calls the Dimension Style Manager.

Fig. 12.32 Twelfth example – Dimension Text Edit

90

Text edited to Right 210

Text edited to Left

There are two command line calls for dimensions – dim and dim1. When using dim, dimension can be added to a drawing without having to enter dim again until all dimensioning of a drawing is completed. If dim1 is entered, only one dimension can be added before dim1 has to be entered again. Example – command line dimensioning (Fig. 12.33)

1. Construct an outline such as that shown in Fig. 12.33. 2. At the command line: Command: enter dim right-click Dim: enter hor right-click Specify first extension line origin: pick Specify second extension line origin: pick Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/text/Angle]: pick Enter dimension 210: right-click Dim: enter ve right-click Specify first extension line origin: pick Specify second extension line origin: pick Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/text/Angle]: pick Enter dimension 155: right-click Dim: enter di right-click Select arc or circle: pick Enter diameter text 20: enter both holes %%c20 Specify dimension line location: pick

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 162

162

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Dim: enter an right-click Select arc, circle, line or specify vertex: pick Select second line: pick Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: pick Enter dimensions 135: right-click Dim: enter l right-click Leader start: nea to pick To point: pick To point: right-click Dimension text 135: enter chamfer 1515 right-click Dim: enter e (Exit) right-click Command: Carry on in this manner until all dimensions have been added to the drawing. The result is given in Fig. 12.33.

chamfer 15 × 15

both holes O20

210

90

155

30

30

°

135

Fig. 12.33 Example – dimensioning from the command line

135

°

50

60

35

Dimensions are associative Example (Fig. 12.34)

1. Construct the outline Drawing 1 of Fig. 12.34. Add its dimensions. 2. Copy the drawing and its dimensions three times. 3. With the Stretch tool, stretch the first copy to the right. The result is given in Drawing 2. 4. With the Stretch tool stretch the second copy vertically upwards. The result is given in Drawing 3. 5. With the Scale tool scale the whole of the third copy to a scale of 1:1.25. The result is given in Drawing 4. These four drawings show that as stretching and/or scaling takes effect the dimensions accommodate to their new sizes – this is associative dimensioning.

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 163

Dimensioning

25 55

Drawing 1 stretched horizontally

25

25

Drawing 2

25

Drawing 1

30

145

25

Fig. 12.34 Example – Associative dimensioning

Drawing 4

31

Drawing 1 stretched vertically

45

Drawing 3

38

Drawing 1 scaled to 1:1.25

69

125

30

55

100

31

30

55

100

163

Revision tips 1. Dimensions can be added to drawing by using tools from the Dimension toolbar or by entering abbreviation for the tools at the command line. 2. Settings for dimension styles are made in the Dimension Style Manager dialog called to screen either by entering ddim at the command line or by a click on the Dimension Style tool icon in the Dimension toolbar. 3. Before using the Baseline dimension tool, setting must be made in the Dimension Style Manager dialog. 4. Before adding dimension linear tolerances to a drawing, check the settings in the Dimension Style Manager.

Exercises 1. Open any of the drawings already saved from working through the examples given in previous pages of this book, or those made in answer to exercises. Fully dimension each of the drawings. 2. Construct the outline in Fig. 12.35. Instead of the dimensions as shown in that illustration, add dimensions showing a tolerance of 0.25. 3. Construct the outline in Fig. 12.36. Add the dimensions and add to the length and diameter dimensions the geometrical symbols shown in Figs 12.37 and 12.38. 4. Construct the outline in Fig. 12.39. Before adding the dimensions adjust settings in the Dimension Style Manager to show two decimal points after each dimension.

0750661763-ch012 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 164

164

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 250 60

40

70

30

50

160

50

30

90°

90° 20

Fig. 12.35 Exercise 2

110

200

Fig. 12.36 Exercise 3

O 0.05

R25

4 Holes O 20

S

Fig. 12.37 Exercise 3 – Circle – geometrical tolerance

93.50

275.75

Fig. 12.38 Exercise 3 – Line – geometrical tolerance

Fig. 12.39 Exercise 4

181.00

0.025 L

229.40

46.25

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 165

CHAPTER 13

Blocks and Inserts

Aims of this chapter 1. To give examples of the methods of constructing blocks for insertion into drawings. 2. To give examples of inserting blocks into drawings. 3. To introduce external references. 4. To explain the differences between blocks, written blocks and external references. 5. To give examples of inserting graphic images into drawings. 6. To introduce and explain the use of attributes.

The Make Block tool Fig. 13.1 shows a number of symbols for the construction of electric or electronics circuit diagrams. To convert each of these symbols into a block taking the battery symbol as an example:

6V LAMP

FUSE

ELECCAP

Fig. 13.1 Electrical/electronics symbols for circuit diagrams

INT

SIGNAL

RESIST

VARCAP

LSR

BATTERY

VARRES

SWITCH

VARREST1

PRSWITCH

CAPAC

NPN

PNP

DIODE

LSD

LED

BRIDGE

165

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 166

166

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Example – making a block (Figs 13.2–13.5)

Fig. 13.2 The Make Block tool icon in the Draw toolbar

1. With the drawings of the symbols on screen, call the Make Block tool with a click on its tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 13.2). The Block Definition dialog appears (Fig. 13.3).

Fig. 13.3 The Block Definition dialog

2. In the Name field enter battery. In the Description field enter Symbol for a battery in electric/electronics diagrams. 3. Left-click the Select objects button. The dialog disappears. Window the battery symbol drawing and right-click. 4. The dialog reappears. Note the icon appearing in the Preview icon area of the dialog (Fig. 13.4).

Fig. 13.4 Preview icon in the dialog

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 167

Blocks and Inserts

167

5. Click the Pick point button (Fig. 13.5). The dialog disappears. Pick the left-hand end line of the battery, using the endpoint osnap to ensure the point is precisely picked. 6. Click the OK button of the dialog. The symbol is saved as a block.

Fig. 13.5 The Pick point button

Repeat this procedure for each of the electric/electronics symbols in turn. Then open the DesignCenter with a click on the DesignCenter tool icon in the Standard toolbar. In the DesignCenter palette, open the directory in which the electric symbols drawing had been saved – in this example Chap13/ELECTRICS (Fig. 13.6).

Fig. 13.6 The DesignCenter showing the symbols saved as blocks

Note

Refer back to Chapter 9 in which the DesignCenter was introduced.

The Insert Block tool There are two methods by which a block can be inserted into a drawing:

Fig. 13.7 The Insert Block tool icon in the Draw toolbar with its flyout

1. Click the Insert Block tool icon in the Draw toolbar (Fig. 13.7). The Insert dialog appears (Fig. 13.8). In the dialog click the Browse . . . button. The Select Drawing File dialog comes to screen from which the required drawing can be selected. 2. Open the DesignCenter palette, select the directory in which the required drawing file is held. Right-click on the icon representing the required drawing and from the right-click menu which appears

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 168

168

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

(Fig. 13.9) select Insert as Block . . . . The Insert dialog appears with the name of the drawing in its Name field. This method does away with the need to use the Insert Block tool.

Fig. 13.8 The Insert and Select Drawing File dialogs

Fig. 13.9 The DesignCenter palette and a right-click menu from a drawing file name

Note

There are differences between inserting a block from the DesignCenter and opening into an application:

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 169

Blocks and Inserts

Fig. 13.10 The Explode check box in the Insert dialog

Fig. 13.11 The Explode tool icon in the Modify toolbar

169

1. A block is an object (entity) no matter how many objects from which it was originally drawn, unless in the Insert dialog, the Explode check box is clicked – which places a tick in the check box (Fig. 13.10), when the block reverts to the number of objects from which it was originally constructed. 2. If an unexploded block is inserted into a drawing it can be exploded by clicking on the Explode tool in the Modify toolbar or entering x at the command line (Fig. 13.11) and clicking on any part of the block. 3. If a drawing is opened in an application window, the resulting drawing is not a block. An example of a drawing being opened in an application window (which in this case is AutoCAD 2004) is given in Fig. 13.12. Fig. 13.9 shows the selection being made from the right-hand menu in the DesignCenter palette for a drawing to be opened in the application.

Fig. 13.12 An example of a drawing being opened from the DesignCenter

Written blocks (wblocks) Another way of constructing a block is to use the wblock tool. This tool is called by entering a w at the command line: Command: enter w right-click Example – constructing a written block (Fig. 13.14)

1. Construct the required block drawing – in this case a bolt (drawing 1 of Fig. 13.14). 2. At the command line: Command: enter w right-click The Write Block dialog appears (Fig. 13.13). Click the . . . button to the right of the File name and path field. The Browse for Drawing

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 170

170

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 13.13 The Write Block and Browse for Drawing File dialogs

File dialog appears. Select a suitable directory and in the File name field enter the name bolt01.dwg (Fig. 13.13). Click the Save button. 3. The dialog disappears showing the Write Block dialog in full. Click its Select objects button, window the drawing of the bolt (Fig. 13.14) and right-click.

Window 1

2

3

Insertion point

Fig. 13.14 Example – a written block

Second block Nut01.dwg

4. Upon the reappearance of the dialog, click the Pick point button and when the dialog disappears, pick a suitable insertion point on the drawing. 5. When the dialog reappears, click its OK button and the block is saved with the title bolt01.dwg in the directory BOLTS.

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 171

Blocks and Inserts

171

Example – insertion of blocks (Fig. 13.16)

1. Construct the sectional drawing given in Fig. 13.15. Its sizes must be based upon the sizes of the drawings bolt01.dwg and nut01.dwg saved as blocks.

Fig. 13.15 Example – insertion of blocks – sectional view

2. Open the DesignCenter and insert the block bolt01 twice into its correct positions in the sectional view. The insertion point saved with the block must be used to assist correct placing. Then place the block nut01 twice in correct relationship with the bolts. 3. Call the Explode tool with a click on its tool icon in the Modify toolbar and explode the four insertions. 4. Use the Trim tool to trim unwanted lines from the blocks (now exploded). The result is given in Fig. 13.16.

Fig. 13.16 Example – insertion of blocks

Notes

1. If the Explode check box in the Insert dialog had been clicked to set the box on (tick in box), there would have been no need to explode the blocks once they were in position.

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 172

172

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

2. In this example the exploding of the blocks was needed because unwanted lines could be seen within the nut block. Many insertions will not require to be exploded in this manner. 3. Note the importance of the insertion points as the blocks are dragged into position.

The flyout from the Insert Block tool icon As seen in Fig. 13.7 (page 167) when a left-click is held on the Insert Block tool icon, a flyout appears. Fig. 13.17 shows the tools in the flyout.

Fig. 13.17 The tool icons in the Insert Block flyout

External references (Xrefs) When a drawing is inserted into another drawing as an external reference, any changes made subsequently to the inserted drawing will be reflected in the xref which has been inserted. Example – external references (Fig. 13.19)

1. Open the drawing in Fig. 13.15. 2. Click the External Reference tool icon in the Insert Block flyout or enter xref at the command line. The Xref Manager dialog appears. 3. Instead of inserting the blocks bolt01 and nut01 as blocks, insert then as xrefs as follows: Click the Attach . . . button of the Xref Manager. 4. The Select External Reference dialog appears (Fig. 13.18). Select the file bolt01.dwg and click the Open button. 5. The Xref Manager reappears showing the name bolt01 in its Name field (Fig. 13.19). 6. Click the dialog’s OK button and the bolt appears on screen with its insertion point at the intersection of the cursor hairs. It can be dragged into its required position. When satisfied that it is in its correction position left-click.

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 173

Blocks and Inserts

173

Fig. 13.18 The External Reference File dialog

Fig. 13.19 The Xref Manager dialog showing the selected xref

Fig. 13.20 The modified drawings of bolt01 and nut01

7. Repeat with the nut01 block. 8. Save the drawing to file. 9. Open the file bolt01.dwg and modify the drawing as shown in the upper drawing of Fig. 13.20. Save the file to its name bolt01.dwg. 10. Repeat with the drawing nut01 modifying it as shown in the lower drawing of Fig. 13.20. 11. Now reopen the file in which the bolt and nut were attached as xrefs. It will be seen that the bolts and nuts have changed to the modified drawings (Fig. 13.21).

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 174

174

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 13.21 The original drawing with its modified xrefs

Note

The difference between an insertion and an external reference is that any subsequent changes made to a drawing placed as an xref in another drawing are reflected in the original drawing into which the xrefs were placed. No such changes take place when a drawing is inserted as a block.

Inserting raster images Raster files of a variety of formats can be inserted into AutoCAD 2004 drawings using the Image tool or by selecting Raster Image . . . from the Insert drop-down menu. There are slight differences between these two methods but both use the Select Image File dialog as shown in Fig. 13.25. Example – Image tool (Figs 13.22–13.28) Fig. 13.22 The Image tool icon in the Insert Block flyout

1. Open the drawing in Fig. 13.23. 2. Click the Image tool icon (Fig. 13.22) or enter im at the command line. The Image Manager dialog (Fig. 13.24) appears. If Raster Image . . . from the Insert drop-down menu is used, this dialog does not appear at this stage. 3. Click the Attach . . . button. The Select Image File dialog appears (Fig. 13.25). Fig. 13.26 shows the popup list from the Files of type field of the dialog. 4. In the Look in field select a directory in which a raster image file can be found. In this case the bitmap file rendering.bmp is selected from the new directory. When the file is selected a preview appears in the preview area of the dialog (Fig. 13.25). This bitmap file has been saved from the rendering of a 3D model of the three-view orthographic projection shown in Fig. 13.23. See Chapter 19 about renderings. 5. Click the dialog’s Open button. The Image dialog appears showing the name of the raster file in its name field (Fig. 13.27). 6. Click the OK button of the Image dialog. The command line shows: Command:_image Specify insertion point: pick or enter coordinates

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 175

Blocks and Inserts 20

50

140

35

R15

Hole Ø20

R20 Holes Ø20

40

10

10

40

R20

180 R30

Fig. 13.23 Example – Image – drawing into which an image is to be inserted

Fig. 13.24 Example – Image – the Image Manager dialog

Fig. 13.25 The Select Image File dialog

175

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 176

176

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Base image size: Width: 1.00000. Height: 1.62760. Millimetres Specify scale factor: enter 100 right-click Command: and the image is placed at the picked insertion point (Fig. 13.28). If its position is not as desired call Move and move the image. Note

The bitmap image inserted into this drawing was saved from the rendering created in AutoCAD 2004 by pressing the key on the keyboard marked Print Scrn. The printed screen was then pasted into the Windows Paint application and saved as C:/ new/rendering.bmp.

Fig. 13.26 The types of raster image files which can be inserted into AutoCAD 2004 drawings

Attributes Tags, prompts and values for attributes can be added to a drawing which can be inserted as a block using the Attribute Definition and Attribute Edit dialogs as shown in the example below. Example – Attributes (Fig. 13.36)

1. In the A3_template.dwt, construct the drawing in Fig. 13.29 and save it to a suitable filename. 2. Open the A3_template.dwt and construct the drawing of a cylinder shown in Fig. 13.30. 3. At the command line: Command: enter ddattdef right-click The Attribute Definition dialog appears on screen. In the dialog make entries as shown in Fig. 13.31. 4. Left-click the Pick Point button. The dialog disappears. The command line shows: ATTDEF

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 177

Blocks and Inserts

177

Fig. 13.27 Example – Image – the Image dialog

Fig. 13.28 Example – Image

Start point: Pick a point for the tag – in this case above the drawing. The tag appears as shown in Fig. 13.32. 4. Open the drawing in Fig. 13.29 again.

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 178

178

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Hole Ø20, 20 deep

90

40

40

R90

40

R50

20

20

Fig. 13.29 Example – Attributes – the drawing into which a block with attributes is to be inserted

Hole Ø10

Ø20

Fig. 13.30 Example – Attributes – the drawing to which the tag is to be applied

Fig. 13.31 Example – Attributes – the Attribute Definition dialog

BRACKET/01/CYLINDER

5. Insert the drawing of a cylinder with its attribute tag (Fig. 13.33). Editing the attribute

Hole Ø10

Ø20

Fig. 13.32 Example – Attributes – the tag applied to the drawing of a cylinder

1. Call the Edit Attribute dialog – with a click on its tool icon in Modify II toolbar (Fig. 13.34). 2. The command line shows: Command:_eaddedit Select a block Pick the block with its attribute. The Enhanced Attribute Editor dialog appears (Fig. 13.35). 3. In its Value field enter NEW/ITEM/CYLINDER and click the Apply button, followed by clicking the OK button.

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 179

Blocks and Inserts 40

179

Hole Ø20, 20 deep

Hole Ø10

Ø20

Fig. 13.33 Example – Attributes – the inserted drawing

90

40

BRACKET/01/CYLINDER

R90

40

R50

20

20

Fig. 13.34 Example – Attributes – the Edit Attribute tool icon in the Modify II toolbar

Fig. 13.35 Example – Attributes – the Enhanced Attribute Editor

4. The attribute on the block changes as shown in Fig. 13.36. 40

Hole Ø20, 20 deep

Hole Ø10

Ø20

90

40

NEW/ITEM/CYLINDER

R90

40

R50

20

Fig. 13.36 Example – Attributes – the edited attribute

20

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 180

180

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Note

Call the Explode tool and click the block. The attribute changes to its original tag.

Revision tips 1. Use the Make Block tool to include drawings in the DesignCenter. 2. The Wblock tool saves a selected area of a drawing as a drawing in its own right. 3. The Insert Block tool can be used to insert drawings into other drawings rather than using the DesignCenter. 4. When a drawing is inserted into another drawing as an external reference (an xref ) any subsequent changes to the original drawing which has been inserted are reflected in the insertion. 5. Raster images – graphics files of the types such as *.bmp, *.tif, etc. can be inserted into an AutoCAD drawing using the Image tool. 6. Tags associated with blocks inserted into drawings as attributes can be edited using the Edit Attributes tool.

Exercises 1. Construct the drawing in Fig. 13.37 in the template, working to any suitable dimensions. Save the drawing to the filename clutch_system.dwg.

Fig. 13.37 Exercise 1 – the drawing clutch_system.dwg

Fig. 13.38 The drawing bolt.dwg

Name:

A. N. Other

Scale:

1:2

Date:

23/11/05

Title:

A CLUTCH SYSTEM 14/C

Then construct the bolt in Fig. 13.38 in another A3_template.dwt screen and save to the filename bolt.dwg. Similarly construct the bolt head in Fig. 13.39 in another A3_template.dwt screen. Save this drawing to the filename head.dwg. Open the drawing clutch_system.dwg and insert the bolt and the bolt head drawings as shown in Fig. 13.40. Save this drawing to the filename clutch_system02.dwg.

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 181

Blocks and Inserts

181

Bolt_head inserted and arrayed 6 times

Fig. 13.39 The drawing bolt_head.dwg

Bolt inserted twice

Fig. 13.40 Exercise 1

M10_BOLT

Fig. 13.41 Exercise 2

STUDENT_NAME

Fig. 13.42 Exercise 3 – the pline rectangle with its attribute

Fig. 13.43 Exercise 3

Name:

A. N. Other

Scale:

1:2

Date:

23/11/05

Title:

A CLUTCH SYSTEM 14/C

2. Open the drawing bolt.dwg and add an attribute as shown in Fig. 13.41. Save this drawing with its attribute to the filename new_bolt.dwg. Open the drawing clutch_system.dwg and insert new_bolt.dwg as a block. Then change the attribute to BOLT_with_WASHER. 3. Construct a polyline rectangle of size 110 by 40 and add the attribute as shown in Fig. 13.42. Save the drawing to a suitable filename. Open the A3_template.dwt and insert the rectangle with its attribute and using the Edit Attribute tool edit the attribute as shown in the top lefthand drawing of Fig. 13.43. Repeat this another eight times editing the attribute each time as shown in Fig. 13.43. 4. Construct a sufficient number of electrical/electronics symbols to construct the circuit drawing in Fig. 13.44 and save each in turn as a wblock. By inserting these symbol drawings construct the circuit as shown. 5. Using the same method as for Exercise 4 construct the circuit diagram in Fig. 13.45.

James

Arthur

Stanley

Adam

Owen

William

David

George

Allen

0750661763-ch013 1/12/04 4:55 PM Page 182

182

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design +ve V Diode

Resistor Resistor

Resistor

LDR

NPN

Resistor Diode 0V

Fig. 13.44 Exercise 4

An electronics circuit for a siren

2 5 3

1 – 9V battery 2 – Press switch 3 – Resistor 4 – Capacitor 5 – NPN transistor

3

1

5 4

4 Siren

Fig. 13.45 Exercise 5

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 183

CHAPTER 14

Building drawing

Aims of this chapter The contents of this chapter are intended to give examples of the type of technical drawings which can be constructed in AutoCAD 2004, without including descriptions of the stages of the construction of the drawings.

Types of building drawing The following types of building drawing are shown in this chapter: Drawing showing site layouts. Drawing showing site plans. Building plans showing floor layouts. Drawings showing the method of construction of details. Such drawings are constructed in different scales according to the area covered by each drawing. Scales of 1:200, 1:100, 1:50 and 1:10 are common in the preparation of building drawings. First example – drawings for 63 Pheasant Drive

The following five examples of building drawings associated with a building at 63 Pheasant Drive are: Fig. 14.1: A site layout drawing showing the situation of the building in Pheasant Drive. Fig. 14.2: A site plan of the building. Fig. 14.3: A plan of floor layout drawing of the two-storey building. Fig. 14.4: Orthographic projections showing views from four directions. Fig. 14.5: A detailed drawing showing a section through the house door of the building.

Construction of floor layout drawings In order to speed up the construction of floor layouts in building drawings a library of building drawing symbols such as that shown in Fig. 14.6 can be constructed and each saved in a file directory. When constructing a floor layouts drawing, the symbols can be inserted (see Chapter 13) in their exact positions in a layout drawing. 183

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 184

184

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Ph

Existing boundary

ea sa nt Dr ive

Boarded fences

Shooters Way

Fig. 14.1 A site layout drawing

New building Ltd.

Scale 1:200

Site layout: 63 Pheasant Drive

12:09:2005

MH

2.5 MH

00

4.0

00

3.9

00

Ph ea sa nt Dr ive

MH 7.0

10

,00

0

Shooters

Fig. 14.2 A site plan drawing

00

Way

New building Ltd.

Scale 1:50

12:09:2005

Site plan: 63 Pheasant Drive

Hatching Hatching can form an important part in constructing building drawings. Examples are given in Chapter 11 – Figs 11.13–11.16, Figs 11.18 and 11.19, Figs 11.23 and 11.28. Other building drawings which include hatched areas are given in this chapter in the detail drawings in Figs 14.5 and 14.12.

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 185

Building drawing

Lounge

185

Dining room

Bedroom 3 Ground floor

Bedroom 1

Upper floor

Fig. 14.3 A drawing showing floor layouts

Kitchen

Bedroom 2

New buildings Ltd.

Scale 1:100

12:09:2005

Floor layouts 63: Pheasant Drive

Side

Front

Side Rear

Fig. 14.4 Orthographic views of the building

New building Ltd.

Scale 1:100

12:09:2005

Elevations: 63 Pheasant Drive

Exercises Except for the drawing for exercise 1, the following exercises are shown without included dimensions. It is suggested that the exercises are worked in the A3_template.dwt, with sizes assessed by the reader. This will entail measuring existing buildings of a similar type including the house in which the reader is living.

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 186

186

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

100 × 40 85 × 45

Putty Glass

85 × 45

170 × 45

Fig. 14.5 A detailed drawing showing a section through a door

New building Ltd.

Scale 1:10

12:09:2005

House door: 63 Pheasant Drive

1. Construct the symbols shown in Fig. 14.6 and save each to a directory on a floppy disk entitled build_symbols.

wall

C MH compass

partition

rainwater runway

bath

sink door02

door01

tree01

cooker

R frig

tree02 basin

up_and_over B

Fig. 14.6 Building drawing symbols

window01

window02

stair

boiler

WC

2. Fig. 14.7 shows the outlines of a floor layout of a bungalow within a grid of 1m2. By the insertion of symbols from the directory build_symbols construct a drawing of the floor layout. 3. Construct the floor layouts as shown in Fig. 14.8 working to dimensions of your own choice. 4. Fig. 14.9 shows a floor layout for a bungalow. By inserting symbols from the build_symbols directory, construct the given layout.

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 187

Building drawing

187

11 10 9 8 7

Window Door

Windows

Window

WC/ BATH KITCHEN/ C.RM 2.3 m × DINING 2.5 m × 3.5 m × 2.5 m 1.0 m 2.5 m

BEDROOM 5 m × 3.5 m

Window Back door

PASSAGE 1m wide

6 5

LOUNGE 5m×3m

4 3

Window

HALL 2m wide

BEDROOM 5m×3m

Entrance

Window

GARAGE 6 m × 3.5 m

2 1

Fig. 14.7 Exercise 2

Up and over door 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

LANDING

BEDROOM 1

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 metres

BATH & WC

BEDROOM 2

BATH

9

BEDROOM 3

UPPER FLOOR CLOAKS STUDY

HALL

KITCHEN

DINING ROOM

LOUNGE

UTILITY

LOWER FLOOR

Fig. 14.8 Exercise 3

5. Fig. 14.10 shows the room layout of a bungalow within its garden boundaries. Working to dimensions of your own, construct the given layout. 6. Fig. 14.11 shows a site plan which includes the rooms’ layout of a bungalow. Construct the given site plan, including the floor layout using the symbols from the build_symbols directory. 7. Construct the sectional view given in Fig. 14.12.

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 188

188

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Up and over door

Bed 2 3.5 m × 3.5 m

Lounge 7m×4m

Kitchen 5 m × 2.5 m

WC

Bathroom 3.5 m × 2 m

Garage 7 m × 2.5 m

Bed 1 3.5 m × 3.5 m

Fig. 14.9 Exercise 4 MH

BATH & WC

BEDROOM 1

KITCHEN

PASSAGE HALL

LIVING ROOM

BEDROOM 2

MH

Fig. 14.10 Exercise 5

BEDROOM 1 4 m × 3.7 m

BEDROOM 2 3.5 m × 3 m

BATHROOM 3.8 m × 2.5 m

PASSAGE GARAGE 6m×3m LOUNGE/DINING 6.2 m × 4.7 m

Pavement

Fig. 14.11 Exercise 6

Mayflower Road

KITCHEN 5.6 m × 2.5 m HALL

0750661763-ch014 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 189

Building drawing

Fig. 14.12 Exercise 7

New building Ltd.

Scale 1:10

18:10:2005

New street: Pavilion building

189

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 190

CHAPTER 15

Edit tools, DXF and EPS files

Aims of this chapter The aims of this chapter are to show how to: 1. Use the Edit tools of AutoCAD 2004 – Copy, Copy Link, Paste and Paste Special. 2. Use the Export tool to form Encapsulated Postscript files (*.eps). 3. To demonstrate the use of DXF files in CAD software.

Example of using the Edit tools Left-click on Edit in the menu bar. The Edit drop-down menu appears as shown in Fig. 15.1. First example – Copy (Fig. 15.2)

1. Open an AutoCAD drawing. Fig. 15.1 shows the drawing from Fig. 13.40 (page 181) in the AutoCAD 2004 window.

Fig. 15.1 First example – Copy – the Edit drop-down menu with a drawing on screen 190

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 191

Edit tools, DXF and EPS files

191

2. Click Copy in the Edit drop-down menu (Fig. 15.1). The command line shows: Command:_copyclip Select objects: window the drawing Select objects: right-click Command: 3. Open the Windows word processing application Microsoft Word. In the blank document on screen click Edit in the menu bar and in the drop-down menu click Paste. A copy of the AutoCAD 2004 drawing appears in the Microsoft Word document (Fig. 15.2).

Fig. 15.2 First example – Copy – the AutoCAD drawing pasted into a Microsoft Word document

Second example – Copy Link

The same result can be obtained using the Copy Link tool from the Edit drop-down menu. Third example – Paste (Fig. 15.4)

1. Open Microsoft Word and type a sentence. Highlight all the text and from the Edit drop-down menu click Copy. 2. Open a drawing in AutoCAD 2004 and click Paste from the Edit dropdown menu. The text from Microsoft Word appears in the AutoCAD window together with the OLE Properties dialog (Fig. 15.3). Click the OK button of the dialog, and the text can be positioned in the AutoCAD drawing (Fig. 15.4).

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 192

192

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 15.3 Third example – Paste – text pasted into AutoCAD

Fig. 15.4 Third example – Paste

Fourth example – Encapsulated Postscript file (Fig. 15.8)

1. Open the drawing saved from constructing Fig. 10.11 (page 128). 2. Click Export . . . from the File drop-down menu (Fig. 15.5). The Export Data dialog appears (Fig. 15.6). From the Files of type popup menu click Encapsulated PS (*.eps) and enter a file name in the File name field, followed by a click on the dialog’s Save button. 3. Open a desktop publishing program. That shown in Fig. 15.8 is PageMaker 6.5. In the PageMaker 6.5 window click on File in the menu bar

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 193

Edit tools, DXF and EPS files

193

Fig. 15.5 Fourth example – Export . . . from the File drop-down menu

Fig. 15.6 Fourth example – the Export Data dialog

and select Place . . . from the drop-down menu which appears. From the Place dialog (Fig. 15.7) select the filename of the Encapsulated Postscript file just saved. The dialog disappears and the *.eps file can be placed into the PageMaker document (Fig. 15.8).

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) When a drawing constructed in AutoCAD is saved as a *.dwg file and then as an *.eps file to be inserted into a document in another application, subsequent changes to the drawing in AutoCAD will automatically be updated in the document of the other application in which the *.eps file has been inserted, if the amended drawing is saved to the same filename.

DXF files The format of the file type *.dxf was originated by Autodesk Ltd, the publishers of AutoCAD. This file type is now recognised by most of the many forms of computer aided design (CAD) software packages currently in use throughout the world. Drawings in most CAD software packages can be saved to the file format *.dxf and the file can then be opened in other CAD software packages. This facility is of great value when drawings are being exchanged between operators using different CAD packages.

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 194

194

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 15.7 Fourth example – *.eps files – the Place dialog in PageMaker 6.5

Fig. 15.8 Fourth example – *.eps files

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 195

Edit tools, DXF and EPS files

195

Example – DXF file (Fig. 15.9)

1. Open a drawing – the example given here is a building plan in Fig. 15.9.

Dining

Ensuite

Lounge

Clks

Ground floor

Kitchen

Bedroom 3

Bedroom 1 Bath

Fig. 15.9 Example – DXF file – the drawing to be saved as a *.dxf file

Upper floor

Bedroom 2

Scale 1:100

FLOOR LAYOUTS

2. From the File drop-down menu select Save As . . .. In the Save Drawing As dialog, select AutoCAD 2004 *DXF (*.dxf ) from the Files of type field (Fig. 15.10).

Fig. 15.10 Example – DXF file – selecting AutoCAD 2004 DXF from the popup list

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 196

196

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

3. Enter a filename in the File name field. In this example this is Fig. 04.dxf. 4. Click the dialog’s Save button. The saved DXF file can now be opened in most other CAD software packages. 5. To open a DXF file in AutoCAD 2004, select Open from the File drop-down menu and in the File of type popup list select DXF (*.dxf ) (Fig. 15.11). Then select the DXF file from its name in the file list of the dialog. Then click the dialog’s Open button. If the same drawing as was saved as a DXF file (*.dxf ) is opened as a DXF file, it will be seen to be identical to the original drawing file (*.dwg file).

Fig. 15.11 Example – DXF file – selecting DXF (*.dxf) from the File of type popup list

Revision tips 1. The Copy and Copy Link tools from the Edit drop-down menu of AutoCAD 2004 can be used to paste drawings into other software application documents. 2. In the same way, text and graphics can be pasted into an Autodesk drawing using the Paste command from the Edit drop-down menu. 3. When a drawing in AutoCAD 2004 is saved as an Encapsulated Postscript (*.eps) file, the *.eps file can be placed into documents in desktop publishing applications. 4. When an *.eps file has been so placed, any subsequent changes in the AutoCAD drawing are reflected in the drawing in the desktop publishing document. This is a form of OLE. 5. DXF files (those with an extension *.dxf ) can be saved from AutoCAD 2004 drawings to be opened in other forms of CAD software applications. 6. Similarly, drawings of the DXF format saved in other CAD applications can be opened in AutoCAD 2004.

Exercises 1. Construct the drawing Fig. 15.12 without including the small drawing. Save your drawing as a *.dwg file. Then save it again as an *.eps file and place the *.eps file into a document in a desktop publisher.

0750661763-ch015 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 197

Edit tools, DXF and EPS files

197

Then amend the drawing as shown in Fig. 15.13 and save it again as a *.dwg file. Note the changes are reflected in the desktop publishing document. 2. If you have access to another CAD software program, practise saving drawings in both AutoCAD 2004 and another CAD program as DXF files. Then open the DXF files in the CAD program in which they were not saved. 3. Practise typing some text in a word processing document and pasting the text into an AutoCAD drawing.

Ø200

70

20

Fig. 15.12 Exercise 1 – original drawing

Fig. 15.13 Exercise 1 – amended drawing

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 198

CHAPTER 16

The Solids tools

Aims of this chapter 1. To introduce the idea of 3D solid model drawing. 2. To introduce the 3D system of AutoCAD 2004. 3. To show the uses of the 3D Views viewing positions of 3D models on screen. 4. To introduce the Solids and Solids Editing toolbars. 5. To describe the methods of constructing 3D solid model drawings using some of the Solids tools, principally the tools Box, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone, Wedge and Torus. 6. To show the value of the Purge tool. 7. To introduce the UCS (User Coordinate System).

3D Solid models So far in this book we have been dealing with drawings constructed in 2D – in which one direction is along the X-axis and the other along the Y-axis. 3D modelling requires the use of a third dimension – along an Z-axis. In 2D drawing any point in a drawing can be determined in terms of its position in the AutoCAD coordinate system in terms of x,y coordinate numbers. In 3D drawings the third axis allows any point in a 3D drawing to be determined in terms of x,y,z coordinate numbers. In practice, while the X coordinate direction is horizontal and the Y coordinate is vertical, the Z coordinate can be regarded as being positive (ve) in the direction perpendicular to the screen and towards the operators, and the negative Z (ve) coordinate being perpendicular to the screen and away from the operator.

3D Views

Fig. 16.1 The 3D Views sub-menu from the Views drop-down menu 198

Click On Views in the menu bar and in the drop-down menu click 3D Views. The sub-menu for 3D Views appears (Fig. 16.1). If a 3D model drawing is on screen at the time, a click on any one of the bottom and lower sections of the sub-menu places the 3D model in the selected viewing position. Figs 16.2 and 16.3 show a simple bracket constructed as a 3D solid model drawing in eight of the 3D View viewing positions.

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 199

The Solids tools

199

Top

Fig. 16.2 Four of the 3D Views viewing positions

Left

SW Isometric

Fig. 16.3 The Isometric viewing positions from the 3D Views sub-menu

NW Isometric

Front

Right

SE Isometric

NE Isometric

The UCS Another method of placing 3D solid models in a variety of viewing positions in 3D space is to use the UCS. More about the UCS later in this

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 200

200

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

chapter. My own advice is to use the 3D Views viewing positions as much as possible when constructing 3D solid models, only using the UCS when a required view is not available from the 3D Views sub-menu of the Views drop-down menu.

The Solids toolbar Right-click in a toolbar on screen and from the menu which then appears, click Solids (Fig. 16.4). The Solids toolbar appears (Fig. 16.5). Repeat this operation to bring the Solids Editing toolbar to screen (Fig. 16.5). Examples of using the Solids tools First example – Box (Fig. 16.10)

To call the Box tool, either click the Box tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 16.6) or enter box at the command line. The tool can also be selected from the Solids sub-menu in the Draw drop-down menu (Fig. 16.7). 1. Open A3_template.dwt. Fig. 16.4 Bringing the Solids toolbar on screen

Fig. 16.5 The Solids and Solids Editing toolbars

Fig. 16.6 The Box tool icon in the Solids toolbar

2. Call the Box tool. The command line shows: Command:_box Specify corner of box or [Center]: 60,100 Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: 130,0 Specify height: 30 Command: 3. Construct a second box of coordinates 60,100 and 310,0 of height 20. 4. Construct a third box of coordinates 185,100 and 215,0 of height 30. 5. Construct a fourth box of coordinates 260,100 and 310,0 of height 20. 6. Place the AutoCAD window into the 3D Views/Front view and Zoom to 1. 7. Call the Move tool and move three of the boxes vertically as shown in Fig. 16.9. 8. Call the Union tool from the Solids Editing toolbar (Fig. 16.8). The command line shows: Command_union Select objects: pick one of the boxes 1 found Select objects: pick another of the boxes 1 found, 2 total Select objects: pick another of the boxes 1 found, 3 total Select objects: pick the last of the boxes 1 found, 4 total

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 201

The Solids tools

201

Select objects: right-click Command: The lowest of the three drawings in Fig. 16.9 shows the result of this union. Note

The Union tool can also be called by entering uni at the command line or by selection from the Solids Editing sub-menu in the Modify drop-down menu. 9. Place the AutoCAD window in the 3D View/SE isometric view. Fig. 16.10 shows the four boxes both before and after Union. 10. Save the drawing to a suitable filename. Second example – Cylinder (Fig. 16.14)

Fig. 16.7 The Solids sub-menu in the Draw drop-down menu

1. Open the drawing of the first example. 2. Place the drawing in the 3D Views/Front view. 3. Call the Cylinder tool either with a click on its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 16.11), by entering cylinder at the command line, or by selecting the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. The command line shows: Command:_cylinder Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 4 Note

Fig. 16.8 The Union tool icon in the Solids Editing toolbar

When constructing cylinders this setting of the variable ISOLINES may be too small, depending upon the wishes of the operator. In this example reset ISOLINES before using the Cylinder tool, as follows: Command: enter isolines Enter new value for ISOLINES 4: 16 Command: Now call the Cylinder tool: Command:_cylinder Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 16 Specify center point for base of cylinder or [Elliptical] 0,0,0: 80,35 Enter radius for base of cylinder or [Diameter]: 10 Specify height of cylinder: 100 Command: 4. Construct another four cylinders as shown in the lower drawing of Fig. 16.12. 5. Place the drawing in the 3D Views/Top view (Fig. 16.13). 6. Call the Move tool and move the five cylinders vertically upwards into their final position in the union of boxes. 7. Place the drawing in the 3D Views/SE isometric view (Fig. 16.14).

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 202

202

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

The 4 boxes in 3D Views/Front

The same after moving 3 of the boxes

Fig. 16.9 First example – Box – moving and forming a union

The same after Union

Fig. 16.10 The four boxes before and after Union

Fig. 16.11 The Cylinder tool icon in the Solids toolbar

The 3D model after Hide

8. Call the Subtract tool from the Solids Editing toolbar (Fig. 16.15). The command line shows: Command:_subtract Select solids and regions to subtract from . . . Select objects: pick the union of boxes Select objects: right-click Select solids and regions to subtract . . . Select objects: pick one of the cylinders 1 found

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 203

The Solids tools

Fig. 16.12 Second example – Cylinder – add cylinders to the first example

Cylinders of radius 10 and height 100 Cylinders of radius 5 and height 100

Fig. 16.13 Second example – Cylinder – the drawing in the 3D Views/Top view

Fig. 16.14 Second example – Cylinder – before subtracting the cylinders

Continue picking cylinders until: Select objects: pick last cylinder 1 found, 5 total Select objects: right-click Command:

203

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 204

204

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

And the five cylinders are subtracted from the boxes union to form a single solid. Third example – Wedge (Fig. 16.19) Fig. 16.15 The Subtract tool from the Solids Editing toolbar

1. In an A3_template.dwt construct two boxes in the 3D Views/Right view using the Box tool as shown in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 16.16. The bottom left-hand corner of the vertical box is at 220,0. The other corners are taken from this first corner.

Wedge rotated 90° and moved

2 boxes 60 high

90

15

15

120

15

Fig. 16.16 Third example – Wedge – the boxes and wedge

Fig. 16.17 The Wedge tool icon in the Solids toolbar

Fig. 16.18 The Hide tool icon in the Render toolbar

105 Stage 1: In 3D Views/Right

Wedge of height 90 Stage 2: In 3D Views/ Top or UCS World

Stage 3: Moving wedge

2. Call the Wedge tool either with a click on its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 16.17) or by entering wedge at the command line or by selecting from the Solids sub-menu in the Draw drop-down menu. The command line shows: Command:_wedge Specify first corner of wedge or [Center]: 255,15 Specify corner or [Cube]: 345,30 Specify height: 90 Command: 3. With the Rotate tool, rotate the wedge to an upright position and then with the Move tool, move the wedge to its central position within the two boxes as indicated in the right-hand drawing of Fig. 16.16. 4. Place the three solids in the 3D Views/NE Isometric view and with the Union tool form the three solids into a single solid (Fig. 16.19). 5. Call the Hide tool – either from the Render toolbar (Fig. 16.18) or by entering hide or hi at the command line. No further action is required when using the Hide tool. When Hide is called all lines behind front solid’s mesh planes are hidden – right-hand drawing of Fig. 16.19. Fourth example – adding cylinders (Fig. 16.20)

1. Place the third example in the 3D Views/Top view and Zoom to 1. 2. Construct cylinders of radius 5 and height 15 in suitable positions.

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 205

The Solids tools

Fig. 16.19 Third example – Wedge

The three solids before Union

205

The three solids after Union and Hide

3. Place in the 3D Views/Right view, Zoom to 1. 4. With the Move tool, move the cylinders to their correct positions relating to the solid model and then with the Subtract tool, subtract them from the solid. 5. Construct four more cylinders, place the drawing back into the 3D Views/Top view, move the cylinders and subtract them from the solid. 6. Place the solid drawing in the 3D Views/NE Isometric view and Call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 16.20. Fifth example – Cone (Fig. 16.22)

Fig. 16.20 Fourth example

Fig. 16.21 The Cone tool icon in the Solids toolbar

To call the Cone tool, either click its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 16.21), enter cone at the command line, or select its name from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. 1. Open A3_template.dwt. 2. Set ISOLINES to 32. 3. Call the Cone tool. The command line shows: Command:_cone Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 32 Specify center for base of cone or [Elliptical]: 160,150 Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: 70 Specify height of cone or [Apex]:: 180 Command: 4. Construct a cylinder of base centre 160,150, radius 70 and height 40. 5. Place in the 3D Views/Front view and Zoom to 1. 6. With the Move tool, move the cone to sit on the top of the cylinder. 7. Construct a box with corners 140,130 and 180,90 and height 120. 8. Place in the 3D Views/Top view and Zoom to 1. 9. With Move, move the box to be central to the cone. 10. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view and Zoom to 1. 11. Union the cylinder and cone, and subtract the box from the union. The result is given in Fig. 16.22.

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 206

206

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Sixth example – Sphere and Torus (Fig. 16.24)

To call these tools either click on their tool icons in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 16.23) or enter sphere or torus at the command line, or select the tools from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu.

Fig. 16.22 Fifth example – Cone

Fig. 16.23 The Sphere and the Torus tools in the Solids toolbar

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Set ISOLINES to 36. 3. Call the Sphere tool. The command line shows: Command: sphere Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 36 Specify center of sphere: 200,160 Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: 65 Command: 4. Call the Torus tool. The command line shows: Command:_torus Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 36 Specify center of torus: 200,160 Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: 65 Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: 20 Command: 5. Place in the 3D Views/Front view and Zoom to 1. 6. Subtract the torus from the sphere. 7. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view and Zoom to 1. 8. Call Hide. The result is shown in Fig. 16.24.

Fig. 16.24 Fifth example – Sphere and Torus

The UCS Another method of setting new views is to use the UCS. Before attempting to use this system make sure the variable UCSFOLLOW is set to 1 (ON) as follows:

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 207

The Solids tools

207

Command: enter ucsfollow right-click Enter new value for UCSFOLLOW 0: enter 1 right-click Command: Failure to set the variable on will result in no action taking place when tools from the UCS are called. The tools of the UCS can be called in a variety of ways: 1. By entering ucs at the command line which then shows: Command: enter ucs right-click Enter an option [New/Move/orthoGraphic/Prev/Restore/Save/Del/ Apply/?/ World] World: enter n (New) right-click Specify an origin of new UCS or [ZAxis/3point/OBject/Face/View/ X/Y/Z]: Options can be taken from the choices given in these sequences. 2. By selection from either the UCS or the UCS II toolbars (Fig. 16.25).

Fig. 16.25 The UCS and UCS II toolbars

3. By selection from the Tools drop-down menu (Fig. 16.26). Note the Orthographic UCS sub-menu of the Tools drop-down menu, from which similar choices can be made as from the 3D Views sub-menu of the Views drop-down menu, although the Isometric views are missing. The UCS icon

When AutoCAD 2004 is opened, the UCS icon appears at the left-hand bottom corner of the window. The icon can be turned off (or on) as follows: Command: enter ucsicon right-click Enter an option [ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin/Properties] ON: enter off right-click Command: and the icon disappears. The icon changes between being in Model Space and Paper Space and when in an Isometric (or other 3D view). Examples of these changes are shown in Fig. 16.27. The icon has another appearance when rendering (see Chapter 19).

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 208

208

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Some examples of using the UCS First example – New (Fig. 16.28)

1. Open the drawing given in Fig. 16.14 and call Hide. 2. At the command line enter ucs followed by entering n for New and using the endpoint osnap select the bottom left-hand corner of the 3D drawing. The UCS icon moves to that point (Fig. 16.28). Second example – 3point (Fig. 16.32)

1. In an A3_template.dwt window construct the two solids as shown in Fig. 16.29 and join them in a union.

Fig. 16.26 The UCS tools can be selected from the Tools drop-down menu

Y Z

Y X

Fig. 16.27 The UCS icon

UCS icon in Model Space

Y

X

X UCS icon in Paper Space

UCS icon in an Isometric view

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 209

The Solids tools

209

Z

Fig. 16.28 The UCS icon in a New position

X

Y

20

Box of height 40 rotated 45°

1

R85

Cylinder of radius 85 and height 40

50

Box and cylinder in Union

Fig. 16.29 Second example – 3point – the two solids in a union

2. At the command line: Command: enter ucs right-click Enter an option [New/Move/orthoGraphic/Prev/Restore/Save/Del/ Apply/?/World] World: enter n (New) right-click Specify an origin of new UCS or [ZAxis/3point/OBject/Face/View/ X/Y/Z]: enter 3 right-click Specify new origin point: pick point 1 (Fig. 16.30) Specify point on positive portion of X-axis: pick point 2 Specify point on positive-Y portion of the UCS XY plane: enter .xy of pick point 1 again (need Z) enter-1 (note minus 1) Command: The solid changes to its new position as shown in Fig. 16.31.

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 210

210

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Point 1

.xy of point 3

Point 2

Fig. 16.30 Second example – 3point – the 3 points

Fig. 16.31 Second – example – 3point – the solid in its 3point position

3. Construct an elliptical cylinder as shown of height 40. Subtract the cylinder from the solid. 4. Place the solid in the 3D Views/NW Isometric view and call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 16.32.

Fig. 16.32 Second example – 3point – in a NW Isometric view after Hide

Note

1. The 3point prompt of the UCS is one of the more important uses of the UCS because the new 3point plane lies on the surface of the

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 211

The Solids tools

211

AutoCAD window, which means that no movement of added solids is required. 2. However note the fact that the third point is a minus figure. 3. Some operators may prefer using the UCS in preference to the 3D Views viewing positions. Personally I find it easier and quicker to use the 3D Views viewing positions for most views, and the UCS for 3point views. 4. The UCS icon is usually showing at the bottom left-hand corner of the AutoCAD window. Some operators prefer to turn this icon off on occasion.

Revision tips 1. When working in 3D a third coordinate (Z) comes into use. The Z-axis is positive towards and negative away from the operator. 2. Use the 3D Views found in the Views drop-down menu to position 3D models in 3D space. 3. The UCS can be used instead of 3D Views. 4. Some of the prompts of the UCS system can be of value in addition to the 3D Views viewing positions, particularly the 3points system of the UCS. 5. Tools from the Solids and Solids Editing toolbars are used to construct 3D model drawings. 6. The various parts of a 3D solid model drawing can be formed into a single 3D model by using the Union tool from the Solids Editing toolbar. 7. Parts of a 3D solid model can be subtracted from each other using the Subtract tool from Solids Editing. 8. The Solids tools can also be called from the Solids sub-menu in the Draw drop-down menu or by entering the name of the tool at the command line. 9. When constructing cylinders, cones and torii, settings of the ISOLINES variable may be necessary. 10. The Hide tool is used to hide lines behind the faces of 3D model drawings. It is only necessary to call the tool, the easiest method being to enter hi at the command line, followed by a right-click. No other action is needed.

Exercises 1. Working to the sizes given in Fig. 16.33 and using the Box and Subtract tools, construct the 3D solid model drawing as shown. 2. Using the tools Box, Cylinder, Union and Subtract construct the 3D solid model drawing described in the two-view orthographic projection given in Fig. 16.34. 3. Fig. 16.35 is a front view of a valve control device. Using the tools Cone, Cylinder, Torus, Union and Subtract, construct a 3D solid model drawing of the device.

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 212

212

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Each cube 40 × 40 × 40

Base 200 × 140 × 50

Fig. 16.33 Exercise 1 200

40

25

60

25

R20

Holes ∅20

15

Fig. 16.34 Exercise 2

210

R5

10

60

∅30

∅120

Fig. 16.35 Exercise 3

4. Construct a 3D solid model drawing of the bracket described by the two-view orthographic drawing given in Fig. 16.36. 5. Fig. 16.37 shows a three-view orthographic projection of part of a clamping device. Construct a 3D solid model drawing of the device using the tools Cylinder, Box, Union and Subtract. 6. Working to the dimensions given in Fig. 16.38 construct the 3D model shown in the isometric drawing given in Fig. 16.39 using the tools Box, Cylinder, Torus, Union and Subtract. 7. Construct the 3D model drawing given in the isometric drawing given in Fig. 16.40 and working to the dimensions given in Fig. 16.41. 8. Fig. 16.42 shows an isometric drawing of the 3D model which should result from constructing this exercise. Fig. 16.43 gives the dimensions and other details for the necessary construction. You will need to use the UCS 3point prompt to set the angle at which the sloping handle is fixed. Use tools Box, Cylinder, Sphere and Union for the construction of the 3D model.

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 213

20

The Solids tools

120

∅50

20

Hole ∅30

90

Fig. 16.36 Exercise 4

45

70

80

60

∅20

40

∅100

30

40

Hole ∅80

Fig. 16.37 Exercise 5

130

40

50 ∅40

40

R2.5

Fig. 16.38 Exercise 6 – a working drawing

Fig. 16.39 Exercise 6

70 × 30

15

213

0750661763-ch016 1/12/04 4:56 PM Page 214

214

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Square 150

∅110 ∅100

Fig. 16.40 Exercise 7 R20

30

5

Holes ∅15

Fig. 16.41 Exercise 7 – an orthographic projection

Holes ∅10

∅20 80

∅10

° 52

25 15

25 20

30

10

Fig. 16.42 Exercise 8

Fig. 16.43 Exercise 8 – details

30

100

∅10 Square 10

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 215

CHAPTER 17

More advanced 3D models

Aims of this chapter The purpose of this chapter is to introduce, describe and give examples of the use of the following aspects of 3D modelling in AutoCAD 2004: 1. To give examples of the use of more of those tools from the Solids and Solids Editing toolbars which were not described in Chapter 16. 2. To give examples of using the following tools from the Solids toolbar: Extrude. Revolve. Slice. Section. 3. To introduce the Setup Profile tool from the Solids toolbar and to give examples of how the tool can be used to produce profile-only views from 3D solid model drawings. Fig. 17.1 The Extrude tool icon in the Solids toolbar

50

25 15

85

The Extrude tool To call the Extrude tool, either click its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 17.1), or enter ext at the command line, or select its name from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. First example – Extrude (Fig. 17.5)

1. In an A3_template.dwt screen, construct the outline given in Fig. 17.2.

20

10

190

Note

15

Fig. 17.2 First example – Extrude – outline to be extruded

The outline must be a closed polyline, otherwise extrusion will not take place. 2. Place in the 3D Views/Front view and Zoom to 1. 3. Set ISOLINES to 16. 4. Call the Extrude tool. The command line shows: Command:_extrude Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 16 Select objects: pick the outline Select objects: right-click Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: 15 215

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 216

216

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify angle of taper for extrusion 0: right-click Command: and the outline extrudes to a height of 15 units. 5. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view and Zoom to 1 and call Hide. The result is given in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 17.3. 6. Call the Fillet tool, set the radius to 7.5 and fillet edges as indicated in the right-hand drawing of Fig. 17.3. 7. Place in the 3D Views/Top view and Zoom to 1, or enter ucs at the command line and enter w to the first prompt sequence line, followed by a zoom to 1.

Fig. 17.3 First example – Extrude – the first extrusion

8. Construct the outline given in Fig. 17.4. Note the enlargement of the right-hand end of the outline.

R1

60

Fig. 17.4 First example – Extrude – the outline for the second extrusion

R7.5

Extrusion R5

R10

9. Extrude this new outline to a height of 50. 10. Add two cylinders of radius 5 and height 10 to the two projections of the first extrusion.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 217

More advanced 3D models

217

11. Place the two extrusions in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. 12. An isometric drawing of the completed example is given in Fig. 17.5.

Fig. 17.5 First example – Extrude

Second example – Extrude (Fig. 17.8)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Open the A3_template.dwt. Place in the 3D Views/Front view. Construct the outline or a leg as shown in Fig. 17.6. Form the outline into a single pline and form an extrusion of height 10 using the Extrude tool. Place the extrusion in the World UCS and form a polar array of three legs (Fig. 17.7). In the centre of the array construct two cylinders of radius 10 and 15, both of height 250, and subtract the inner cylinder from the outer. Place in the 3D Views/Front view and move the pipe just formed vertically upwards to a suitable position. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. The result is shown in the isometric drawing given in Fig. 17.8. Third example – Extrude (Fig. 17.10)

1. In an A3_template.dwt screen and in the 3D Views/Front view, zoom to 1 and construct the outlines given in Fig. 17.9. 2. Extrude the main outline and the circles to a height of 5 units. Subtract the circles (now cylinders) from the main extrusion. Extrude the outline of the knob and its hole to a height of 7.5 units and subtract the hole from the knob.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 218

218

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 10 2

R20 R30

3

5

1

R15 R10

After Trim

Centres of circles

110 5

100

4

Fig. 17.6 Second example – Extrude – 5 stages in forming the outline of one leg

After using Mirror and adding line using osnap tan

After Offset 3

Fig. 17.7 Second example – Extrude – the legs and pipe in UCS World

3. With the Move tool, move the knob into its correct position in relation to the arm. 4. Place the 3D models in the UCS World. 5. With the Mirror tool, mirror the arms so as to construct two arms 30 units apart. 6. With the Move tool, move the knob to a correct position relative to the arms.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 219

More advanced 3D models

219

Fig. 17.8 Second example – Extrude

R15

10

0 R5

R50

70°

R20

° 120

Fig. 17.9 Third example – outline of one of the arms and the knob

Holes Ø15

25

R15

Holes ∅15

7. Return to the 3D Views/Front view and construct two cylinders of radius 20 and 7.5 and both 30 units high, central to the knob. Subtract the smaller cylinder from the larger. 8. Go back to the UCS World and with Move, move the cylinder central to the assembly. 9. Place the assembly in the 3D Views/Right view and construct an octagonal extrusion of length 80 units with a hole through of radius 7.5 units. 10. Place the assembly in the UCS World and with the Move tool, move the octagonal extrusion into a suitable position to be made into an union with the cylinder of radius 20 units. 11. With the Union tool join the last two solids together. 12. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view and the result should look like Fig. 17.10.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 220

220

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 17.10 Third example – Extrude – the four parts of the 3D model so far

Note

A bolt for holding the knob in position will be described later in this chapter. Fourth example – Extrude (Fig. 17.13)

1. In an A3_template.dwt screen and in UCS World, construct the polygons and circle as shown in Fig. 17.11. In the 3D Views/Front view, construct the semi-ellipse with its ends central to the polygon as shown. 2. Place the drawings in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view (Fig. 17.12).

70

Path in plan view

Polygons and circle in UCS World R30

65

250

Fig. 17.11 Fourth example – Extrude – the objects and path

Semi-elliptical path in 3D Views/Front

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 221

More advanced 3D models

221

Fig. 17.12 Fourth example – Extrude – the objects and path in a 3D Views/SW Isometric view

3. Call Extrude. The command line shows: Command:_extrude Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 16 Select objects: pick one of the polygons Select objects: right-click Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: 30 (note the minus) Specify angle of taper for extrusion 0: right-click Command: 4. Repeat with the other polygon. 5. After extruding the second polygon, right-click. The command line shows: Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 16 Select objects: pick the circle Select objects: right-click Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: enter p (Path) right-click Select extrusion path or [Taper angle]: pick the semi-ellipse Command: 6. Using the Union tool form the three extrusions into a single 3D solid model drawing, and the extrusion forms along the semi-ellipse. Fig. 17.13 shows this extrusion in an isometric drawing.

Fig. 17.13 Fourth example – Extrude

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 222

222

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

The Revolve tool

Fig. 17.14 The Revolve tool icon in the Solids toolbar

To call the Revolve tool, either click its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 17.14) or enter rev at the command line, or select the tool name from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. When called, the command line shows: Command:_revolve Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 4 Select objects: First example – Revolve (Fig. 17.17)

2.5

40

10

1. In an A3_template.dwt and working in the UCS World, construct the object shown in the bottom left-hand drawing of Fig. 17.15. Make sure the axis line is included.

Ø130

17.5

Ø95

Enlarged view of a slot in the wheel 30° R5

15

5

40

Ø10

R5 Object to be revolved

Fig. 17.15 First example – Revolve – details of the sizes of the model

Axis

2. Set ISOLINES to 24. 3. Call the Revolve tool. The command line shows: Command:_revolve Current wire frame density: ISOLINES 24 Select objects: pick the outline of the object to be revolved Select objects: right-click Specify start point for axis of revolution or define axis by [Object/X (axis)/ Y (axis)]: pick the axis Specify endpoint of axis: pick an end of the axis Specify angle of revolution 360: right-click Command: and the solid of revolution is formed. 4. Using the 3point prompt of the UCS command, place the model in a suitable UCS plane (Fig. 17.16).

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 223

More advanced 3D models

223

New origin point point on positive-y portion of XY plane .xy of +1

Fig. 17.16 The points on the new 3point UCS plane

point on positive portion of X-axis

5. Construct the outline of the slot (right-hand drawing of Fig. 17.15) and extrude to a height of 10 (note the minus). 6. With the Array tool form an 8-part polar array of this extrusion centred on the centre of the solid. Subtract the extrusions from the solid of revolution. 7. Place the solid in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. The result is given in Fig. 17.17.

Fig. 17.17 First example – Revolve

Second example – Revolve (Fig. 17.19)

5

1. In an A3_template.dwt construct the outline shown in Fig. 17.18. 2. Call the Revolve tool and revolve the outline through 360°.

90

20

40

50

30

5 5

35

Fig. 17.18 Second example – Revolve – the object to be revolved

60

R28

40

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 224

224

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

3. Place the solid in the UCS World view and construct a box 80 long by 30 wide and 120 high. 4. Subtract this box from the solid of revolution and place the resulting 3D solid model in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view (Fig. 17.19).

Fig. 17.19 Second example – Revolve

Third example – Revolve (Fig. 17.21)

12.5 The pline after Revolve

20

7.5

60

7.5

1. Open the drawing of the 3D solid model drawing in Fig. 17.10 and place in the 3D Views/Front view. 2. In its correct position in relation to the assembly of the model in this view, construct the object (left-hand drawing of Fig. 17.20) from which a solid of revolution of the bolt for the assembly can be constructed.

Fig. 17.20 Third example – Revolve – details of the bolt

Enlarged view of end of pline

3. The outline of the screw thread of the bolt is constructed with the Polyline tool using a sequence such as: From point: pick a start point To point: @230 To point: @2150 To point: @230 To point: @2150 continuing until the outline of the thread is long enough. Then make sure the whole outline is a single pline, if necessary by using Pedit. 4. Place the bolt in its correct place relative to the remainder of the solid. The result is given in Fig. 17.21.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 225

More advanced 3D models

225

Fig. 17.21 Third example – Revolve

The Slice tool Example – Slice (Figs 17.22–17.25)

The 3D model selected for this example is of a small portable vice (Fig. 17.23). It is assumed the 3D model drawing has already been constructed in an A3_template.dwt screen.

Fig. 17.22 The Slice tool icon in the Solids toolbar

Fig. 17.23 Example – Slice the 3D model for this example

1. Place the drawing in the UCS World plane. 2. Call the Slice tool – either click its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 17.22) or by entering slice at the command line, or by selecting the tool name from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. The command line shows: Command:_slice Select objects: pick the base 1 found Select objects: pick the slider 1 found, 2 total Select objects: right-click

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 226

226

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify first point on slicing plane or [prompts] 3points: pick first point (Fig. 17.24) First point

Fig. 17.24 Example – Slice – the 3 points of the slicing plane

Second point

Third point (.xy of +1)

Select second point on plane: pick second point Select a third point on plane: enter .xy right-click of pick third point (need Z) enter 1 right-click Select a point on desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: pick Command: 3. Place the resulting model in the 3D Views/NE Isometric view. The result is given in Fig. 17.25.

Fig. 17.25 Example – Slice

The Section tool Example – Section (Fig. 17.27)

This example uses the same model as for the previous example (Slice). 1. Undo the slicing action and place the model in the UCS World view.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 227

More advanced 3D models

Fig. 17.26 The Section tool icon in the Solids toolbar

227

2. Make the Construction layer the current layer. 3. Call the Section tool, either with a click on its tool icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 17.26) or by entering section at the command line, or by selecting its name from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. The command line shows: Command:_section Select objects: pick base 1 found Select objects: pick slider 1 found, 2 total Select objects: right-click Specify first point on Section plane by [prompts] 3points: pick first point (as in Fig. 17.24) Specify second point on plane: pick second point Specify third point on plane: enter .xy right-click of pick third point (need Z) enter 1 right-click Command: and a line appears along the edge of the selected plane. 4. Place the drawing in the 3D Views/Front view and Zoom to 1. 5. Turn Layer 0 off. The two section outlines (base and slider) appear. If wished these can be hatched as shown in the lower drawing of Fig. 17.27.

Fig. 17.27 Example – Section

The Setup Profile tool To call the Setup Profile tool, either click its icon in the Solids toolbar (Fig. 17.28) or enter solprof at the command line, or select the name of the tool from the Solids sub-menu of the Draw drop-down menu. The tool uses a Paper Space window, called with a click on a Layout tab at the bottom of the AutoCAD 2004 window. Although a solprof drawing appears to be a 3D model drawing, in fact it is in a pictorial drawing in a 2D window. First example – Setup Profile (Fig. 17.32) Fig. 17.28 The Setup Profile tool icon in the Solids toolbar

The 3D model for this example is shown in Fig. 17.29. This is an exploded assembly 3D solid model drawing which consists of four parts.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 228

228

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 17.29 First example – Setup Profile – the 3D model used in the example

1. In an A3_template.dwt screen, construct the 3D model as shown in Fig. 17.29. 2. Click the Layout1 button. The Page Setup–Layout1 dialog appears. Click its OK button. The 3D model drawing appears in a Layout1 window (Fig. 17.30) – that is in PSPACE (Paper Space).

Fig. 17.30 First example – Setup Profile – the 3D model drawing in a Layout window

3. Call the Setup Profile tool. The command line shows: Command:_solprof A model space viewport must be active to use SOLPROF

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 229

More advanced 3D models

229

(Use MVIEW and MSPACE commands) Command: enter mv (MVIEW) right-click Specify corner of viewport or [prompts] Fit: right-click Regenerating drawing Command: enter ms (MSPACE) right-click MSPACE Regenerating drawing Command: Notes

1. At this point it may be necessary to place the drawing in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. 2. When one becomes accustomed to using the Setup Profile tool, before calling Solprof, call MVIEW and MSPACE, followed by calling Solprof. 3. Call Setup Profile. The command line shows: Command:_solprof Select objects: window the whole drawing 4 found Select objects: right-click Display hidden profile on separate layer? [Yes/No]: Y: rightclick Project profile lines onto a plane? [Yes/No]: Y: right-click Delete tangential edges? [Yes/No]: Y: right-click 4 solids selected Command: 4. Open the Layers popup list and turn all layers other than that named PV, followed by letters and/or numbers – in this example it is PV–1C7 (Fig. 17.31). Make layer PV–1C7 current. The result is shown in Fig. 17.32.

Fig. 17.31 First example – Setup Profile – turn off all layers except that beginning with PV

Second example – Setup Profile (Fig. 17.34)

This example is of a simple clamp with its screw in an exploded assembly 3D solid model drawing (Fig. 17.33).

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 230

230

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 17.32 Example – Setup Profile – the Solprof drawing in Layout1 window

Follow the same procedures as for the first example, but from placing the model into Layout1 first call MVIEW followed by calling MSPACE as follows: Command: enter mv (MVIEW) right-click [prompts]: enter f (Fit) right-click Command: enter ms (MSPACE) right-click Command: enter solprof right-click Select objects: window the whole drawing 4 found Select objects: right-click Display hidden profile on separate layer? [Yes/No]: Y: rightclick Project profile lines onto a plane? [Yes/No]: Y: right-click Delete tangential edges? [Yes/No]: Y: right-click 4 solids selected Command: The resulting profile-only drawing within its Layout1 window is shown in Fig. 17.34.

Revision tips

Fig. 17.33 Second example – Setup Profile – the 3D model drawing

1. When using the Extrude tool, ensure the pline being extruded is a closed outline. Otherwise it will not extrude. 2. Note the Path option when extruding. Some interesting extrusions can be constructed using this option. 3. When extruding outlines which include circles, arcs or ellipses, it is best to set the ISOLINES variable to 16 or more depending upon the complexity of the outline.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 231

More advanced 3D models

231

Fig. 17.34 Second example – Setup Profile

4. When placing a 3D model in a new viewing position it will be necessary to zoom to 1. 5. The Fillet and Chamfer tools can both be used to produce fillets and/or chamfers in 3D model drawings. 6. The UCS command line options are of use at times, particularly the 3points option. 7. It is quicker to use the UCS World prompt than 3D Views/Top. 8. Although the Revolve examples in this chapter show 3D models revolved through 360°, solids of revolution can be constructed through other rotations such as 45°, 180° or other revolutions. 9. Note the term ‘solid of revolution’. 10. Setting ISOLINES is also important when constructing solids of revolution with the aid of Revolve. 11. When using the Slice or Section tools, the three points in producing the plane of slice or of section, follow the same methods as when using the 3points option of the UCS. 12. To hatch a section from using the section tool, construct the section plane in a different layer to those in which the solid is constructed. 13. The Setup Profile (solprof ) tool is used to construct outline-only pictorial views of a 3D model. 14. Solprof views are 2D, even though constructed from 3D models. 15. When constructing solprof views, use the Layout1 tab to place the model in Paper Space. 16. Solprof views can only be constructed after calling the MVIEW tool, followed by calling MSPACE. 17. Some of the isometric views shown in this book to emphasise the final answer to exercises are solprof views.

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 232

232

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Exercises 1. Fig. 17.35 shows a pictorial view of the 3D model drawing of the bracket for this exercise. Fig. 17.36 is a three-view orthographic projection of the model. Construct a 3D solid model drawing of the bracket. 10

5

40

5

R5 30

Fig. 17.35 Exercise 1 – a pictorial view

40

100

Hole Ø15

5

30

120

95

5

95

Fig. 17.36 Exercise 1 – an orthographic projection

R10

2. Construct the 3D model drawing shown in the solprof view in Fig. 17.37, working to the dimensions given in Fig. 17.38. 3. Construct the outline given in Fig. 17.39 and using the Revolve tool produce the solid of revolution shown in Fig. 17.40. The pins are added after the solid has been constructed. 4. The two pictorial views in Fig. 17.41 show this 3D solid from both sides. Working to the information given in Fig. 17.42 construct the 3D

R2.5

Hole ∅10 ∅17.5

∅15 R35

Fig. 17.37 Exercise 2 – a solprof view 75

R2 5

Hole ∅10

Fig. 17.38 Exercise 2

∅15

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 233

More advanced 3D models

233

10

5

80

45

20

5

Axis

45

Fig. 17.39 Exercise 3 – details of the sizes of the outline from which the solid of revolution is obtained Fig. 17.40 Exercise 3

solid model drawing and from your model construct the solprof views shown in Fig. 17.41. 5. Construct the 3D model shown in the pictorial view in Fig. 17.43, working to the information given in the orthographic projection given in Fig. 17.44. From your 3D model construct the solprof view as shown in Fig. 17.43. 6. Construct the solprof view in Fig. 17.45, working to the orthographic projection given in Fig. 17.46. 7. Construct the solprof view in Fig. 17.47, working to the information given in Fig. 17.48.

5

Fig. 17.41 Exercise 4

50

10

10

Hole Ø20

Ø160 Ø20 6-sided polygon in circle Ø75

Fig. 17.42 Exercise 4 – details of the dimensions and shapes

Ø40

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 234

234

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Ø200

50

30

Fig. 17.43 Exercise 5

R10 40

5

40 100

5

25 15

Fig. 17.44 Exercise 5 – details of sizes

Holes Ø10

8. Construct a 3D solid model drawing from the information given in Fig. 17.49. Place the model in a suitable viewing position and using the Slice tool, slice the model into four parts. Then with the Move tool move the parts apart from each other and from the resulting 3D model, construct the solprof view given in Fig. 17.50.

45

Hole Ø20

R45 R35 Hole Ø50

R15

115

R20 95 5 Hole Ø25

5 20

Fig. 17.46 Exercise 6 – an orthographic projection

35

Ø38

10

Fig. 17.45 Exercise 6

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 235

More advanced 3D models

Fig. 17.47 Exercise 7 95 110

Ø90

15

35

85

R20

40 R48 R78 R30

R5

30 20

100

Ø15

10

Ø15

200

5

Fig. 17.48 Exercise 7 – an orthographic projection

R10

10

130

R10

Ø120 Ø100

Ø30

Fig. 17.49 Exercise 8 – two-view orthographic projection

Hole Ø20

235

0750661763-ch017 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 236

236

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 17.50 Exercise 8

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 237

CHAPTER 18

Viewports

Aims of this chapter 1. To introduce the idea of multiple viewports and to demonstrate the advantages of working in them. 2. To give examples of working in multiple viewports.

Viewports So far in this book we have always worked in a single viewport – the drawing area of the AutoCAD 2004 window. To set multiple viewports, click View in the menu bar and in the drop-down menu which appears (Fig. 18.1), click Viewports . . . , which brings up a sub-menu. In the submenu select New Viewports . . . .

Fig. 18.1 Selecting New Viewports . . . from the View drop-down menu

Click New Viewports . . . and the Viewports dialog appears (Fig. 18.2). In this illustration the Four: Equal setting is shown as selected with Setup at 3D. A click in any of the viewports shown in the dialog makes that viewport current. Note that when a viewport is made current, the setting in the Change view to popup changes to the view setting in that viewport. Fig. 18.3 shows the contents of this popup list. 237

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 238

238

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 18.2 The Viewports dialog showing the Four: Equal setting

Fig. 18.3 The popup list from the Change view to field

Fig. 18.4 shows the AutoCAD 2004 window resulting from selection of the Four: Equal setting.

Y

Y x

X

Fig. 18.4 The Four: Equal viewports setting

Z

Y x

Y x

In Fig. 18.4 note the UCS icons in each of the viewports. Note also that the top-right viewport is the current one – it is highlighted with a thicker black line. Referring to Fig. 18.2, this is the Front viewport.

The variables UCSFOLLOW and UCSVP The variable UCSVP is new to AutoCAD 2004. Provided the variable UCSFOLLOW is off (set to 1), the viewports will observe the view settings as selected in the Viewports dialog. Another setting which can be

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 239

Viewports

239

used to control the view settings when in multiple viewports is the variable UCSVP. In this chapter it is assumed this variable is on. If required the variable can be set off as follows: Command: enter ucsvp right-click Enter new value for UCSVP 1: enter 0 right-click Command: It is also advisable to set the UCSICON at its Norigin setting. This places the icon at the bottom left-hand corner of each viewport when multiple viewports are in use. This setting is made as follows: Command: enter ucsicon right-click Enter an option [ON/OFF/Noorigin/ORigin/Properties] ON: enter n (Noorigin) right-click Command: Because of the effects of these settings it is suggested that when working in multiple viewports, the UCSFOLLOW variable is set to 0, the UCSVP variable is left at 1 (its default value) and the UCSICON setting is at n. To avoid constantly having to change these settings it is advisable to make them in the A3_template.dwt template before working through this chapter.

Example of constructions in viewports The examples which follow will show the advantages of constructing 3D solid model drawings in several viewports. As the construction proceeds in one viewport, views in the other viewports show the model from different viewpoints, making it easier to assess errors and to place parts in their correct positions. First example – Four: Equal setup (Fig. 18.6)

1. Open the A3_template.dwt with its revised settings of UCSFOLLOW and the UCS icon. 2. From the Viewports dialog select Four: Equal and accept the settings of views in each viewport. 3. Click in the Front viewport (top-right) and construct two cylinders of radii 55 and 65 and of height 40. Subtract the inner from the outer cylinder. 4. Click in the Right viewport (top-left). Construct a pline of the outline of the projection which takes a bolt and a circle for the bolt (Fig. 18.5). Extrude both to a height of 30 and subtract the hole from the main extrusion. 5. Click in the Front viewport and with the Move tool, move the extrusion to its correct position relative to the two cylinders. 6. Unite the two solids. 7. Click in the Right viewport and construct a box 70 50 of height 5. 8. Click in the Front viewport set Snap to 5 and with the Move tool, move the box to its correct position relative to the solid. Subtract the box from the solid.

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 240

240

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Details of the projection for the bolt

40

35

Ø20

@3<60 and @3<300 10

10

15

Details of the bolt

Fig. 18.5 First example – Four: Equal – details of clip and bolt

55

9. Click in the Top viewport (bottom right) and construct the outline for the bolt solid of revolution (Fig. 18.5). With Revolve, form a solid of revolution from the outline. 10. Click in the Front viewport and with the Move tool, move the bolt into its correct position. The resulting four viewport window is shown in Fig. 18.6.

Y

Y X

X

Y

Fig. 18.6 First example – Four: Equal

Z

Y X

X

11. Click in the bottom left-hand viewport (Isometric), followed by another click on the Layout1 tab. The isometric view appears in a single viewport. 12. Form a solprof outline from the isometric drawing (Fig. 18.7). Second example – Three: Left setup (Fig. 18.9)

1. In an A3_template.dwt screen, choose a Three: Left viewports setup.

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 241

Viewports

241

Y

X

Z

Fig. 18.7 First example – Four Equal – solprof of the isometric viewport

2. In the Top viewport (bottom right), construct two extrusions one 240 150 and 20 high with corners filleted at a radius of 20, the second 220 130 and 10 high with its corners filleted to a radius of 10. 3. In the Front viewport and with the Move tool, move the smaller extrusion vertically upwards by 10 units. Subtract the smaller from the larger extrusion. 4. In the Top viewport construct five cylinders all of a height of 40 (Fig. 18.8). 45

75

45

Ø50

Ø40

Fig. 18.8 Second example – Three: Left – details of positions of cylinders

Ø50

Ø60

5. In the Top viewport construct five further cylinders of a radius of 10 less than the other five and subtract them from the larger cylinders. 6. In the Front viewport and with the Move tool, move the last five cylinders vertically up by 35 units and unite them with the main solid. 7. In the Isometric viewport call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 18.9.

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 242

242

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Y X

Z

Fig. 18.9 Second example – Three: Left

Y

Y

X

X

Third example – Four: Left (Fig. 18.10)

This example is given here to show how a more complicated 3D drawing – that of an exploded assembly of a piston and its connecting rod – can be constructed in a viewport setting. No details of the method of construction are given. This is only an example. The viewport setting is Four: Left with viewports changed to: Top left: Right view. Centre left: Top view. Bottom left: Front view. Main viewport: NW Isometric view. Hide was called in the NW Isometric viewport. Fig. 18.10 shows the four-viewport drawing and Fig. 18.11 the working drawing from which details for the 3D model were taken.

Fig. 18.10 Third example – Four: Left

Example – moving viewports

If required, viewports with their contents can be moved. To move a viewport: 1. Click a Layout tab. Click the OK button of the Page Setup dialog.

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 243

Viewports

DO NOT SCALE

Dimensions in millimeters 70 63 58

150 Holes Ø10

243

20

20 Hole Ø20

Ø70

R20

Sphere Ø40

Sphere Ø64

8

M10

45

25

20

45 30

Pin 70 × Ø20

Fig. 18.11 Third example – working drawing

A. Reader

Scale 1:1

Date: 23:6:2005

Part: 8/45 + 8/46

PISTON & CONNECTING ROD

2. Paper Space appears showing only the current viewport. Call MVIEW as follows: Command: enter mv right-click Specify corner of viewport or [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object /Polygonal/Restore/2/3/4/] Fit: enter r (Restore) right-click Enter viewport configuration name or [?]*Active: right-click Specify first corner or [Fit] Fit: right-click Command: The Four: Left layout appears on top of the single current viewport. 3. Call Erase and click the boundary edge of the old viewport. It and its contents disappear showing the four-viewport layout. 4. Call the Move tool and any viewport can be dragged to a new position via its bounding edge. Fig. 18.12 shows the last example with the three small viewports dragged into the large viewport. This screen can be printed as it stands if required. A Plot Preview of this Layout window shows the result of plotting the window (Fig. 18.13).

Revision tips 1. The construction of 3D solid model drawings is made easier by working in multiple viewports. 2. Make sure that the variable UCSFOLLOW is set to off (0) before using multiple viewports. 3. It may be advisable to set the variable UCSICON to Noorigin before using multiple viewports. 4. The view in any viewport can be set by selection from the Change view to: popup list of the Viewports dialog.

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 244

244

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 18.12 Example – moving viewports

Fig. 18.13 Example – moving viewports – a Plot Preview of the layout window

5. The viewing position in any viewport can also be changed by making a viewport the current one, followed by selection from the 3D Views sub-menu of the View drop-down menu. 6. When in a Layout window viewports can be moved if wished.

Exercises If the examples and exercises which have been given in this book have been worked, by now readers should be able to attempt some more advanced constructions. Before attempting the three exercises which follow, it is

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 245

Viewports

245

advisable to work through the first two examples given in this chapter and then attempt the third. This advice is given because the three exercises given here are more difficult than those in preceding chapters. 1. Fig. 18.14 shows a two-view orthographic projection of a hanging pulley. Working in a Four: Left viewport window construct a 3D solid model drawing of the pulley. Ø70 25 Ø30

5 10

5

R10 Ø150

155

40

Ø120

Detail of pulley

120

Ø90

Pin Ø15 5 10

Fig. 18.14 Exercise 1

2. Fig. 18.15 is an exploded orthographic projection of a machine adjusting spindle. Working in a Three: Right viewport window, construct a solid model drawing of the assembled spindle. 3. Fig. 18.16 shows the four parts of a fork assembly. Working in a Four: Equal viewport window, construct a 3D solid model drawing of the assembled fork.

2

1

5

3

6

8

Ø30

A

Tapped M10

R6

Ø24

12 40

4

18

80

5

M6 Ø12 Ø24

7 28

25

40°

6

10

A 26 × Ø3 R12

Hole Ø10

Fig. 18.15 Exercise 2

&&c90

24

130 100

12

45

15

15

Part No. Name of part 1 SPINDLE AND PIN 2 SHOULDER WASHERS 3 BRACKET 4 LOCKSCREW 5 WASHER 6 HANDLE MACHINE ADJUSTING SPINDLE

0750661763-ch018 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 246

246

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design CHA 5 × 5

2

Ø40 1 2 3 4

Hole Ø5

10

105

Ø20

R20

FORK END HOLDING PIN SHAFT SAFETY PIN

Tapped M6

3

R5 Ø20

140 40 90

1

15

Fig. 18.16 Exercise 3

Ø16

R5 100

50

70

4

M16

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 247

CHAPTER 19

Rendering

Aims of this chapter 1. To introduce the concept of rendering. 2. To give example of adding lights, colours, materials and shading to 3D solid model drawing for the purpose of rendering. 3. To show the differences between the varieties of rendering options. 4. To introduce the concept of adding backgrounds to rendered 3D models.

Introduction Rendering is a system for producing photographic-like coloured images from 3D solid model drawings. When rendering 3D models in AutoCAD 2004: 1. A 3D model drawing is constructed. 2. Suitable lighting is placed in 3D space to illuminate the model. 3. Colours or ‘materials’ are attached to parts of the 3D model to give an appearance of having been constructed from suitable materials. 4. The 3D model is placed in a good viewing position (from 3D Views). 5. Backgrounds can be added if required. 6. The model can now be rendered.

Rendering options 1. Rendering without added lights, colours or ‘materials’. Automatically applies a nonadjustable light as if set behind and above the viewer in the direction of the model being rendered. 2. Rendering when ‘materials’ have been attached without added lights. 3. Rendering with added lights, colours and/or ‘materials’. 4. Photo Real rendering which can include shadows and can give realism to transparent ‘materials’ such as glass. 5. Photo Raytrace which will generate reflections and a better definition of shadows. Note

Rendering requires patience because it is one of the more time-consuming activities in 3D CAD work. This is particularly so because it is advisable to 247

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 248

248

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

check that the quality of lighting, colours, ‘materials’ and shadows is appropriate for the model being rendered as each are added if the best results are to be obtained. Placing a model in different viewing positions may also be necessary to check whether the best possible results have been obtained.

The Render tools Tools for rendering can be selected from the Render toolbar (Fig. 19.1) or from the Render sub-menu of the View drop-down menu (Fig. 19.2).

Fig. 19.1 The tools in the Render toolbar

Fig. 19.2 The Render tools can be selected from the Render sub-menu of the View dropdown menu

Rendering lighting

Five types of lighting are available when illuminating 3D models to be rendered in AutoCAD 2004 window. Rendering without adding lights

A quick check can be made before any lights are included in a scene to be rendered as to whether the viewing position, zoom scale, colours and/or materials are acceptable, by calling the tool Render, either with a click on Render the tool icon in the Render toolbar or by entering render at the command line. Default lighting illuminates the 3D model in a scene as if a light has been placed from behind and above the viewer, directed at the model being rendered.

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 249

Rendering

249

Types of rendering lights

Four types of lighting other than the default lighting are available. The intensity of each of these types is adjustable in the dialogs in which values, positions, shadows and intensity are set. Either click on the Lights tool icon in the Render toolbar, or enter light at the command line. The Lights dialog (Fig. 19.3) appears. Fig. 19.3 shows the popup list appearing with a click in the New . . . field. This list names three of the lighting types, the fourth being Ambient. In the top right-hand corner of the dialog the intensity of Ambient Light can be set by adjusting its Intensity slider. The intensity figure setting appears in a box to the top right-hand side of the slider as it is adjusted. Ambient light: Overall background lighting giving constant illumination from all possible directions. An ambient light intensity of 0.3 is usually accepted as suitable for most rendering situations. Point light: Radiating light in all directions from the position in which the light has been placed. Point light diminishes in intensity with distance from its source. Distant: Light in parallel rays from the position in which it is placed. There is no diminution of the light no matter how far the object being illuminated is from the position of the light. Spotlight: Light as if from a spotlight. The light is directional and in the form of a cone with a ‘hotspot’ cone forming a bright spot of light onto the model being illuminated. Spot light diminishes in intensity with distance from its source. Note

Settings for any of the four light types can be made in the various lights dialogs. As an example see Fig. 19.4 in which settings for a New Point Light can be made.

Fig. 19.3 The Lights and Select Color dialogs

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 250

250

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 19.4 The New Point Light dialog

Intensity: Can be set either by adjusting the position of a slider, or by entering a number in the Intensity field of the respective light dialog. Position: Click the Modify button and the position(s) of the light can be adjusted in the AutoCAD window. Attenuation: Point and spotlights allow settings of None, Inverse Linear and Inverse Square attenuation: None: No diminution of the light no matter how far from its source. Inverse Linear: Illumination decreases as an inverse proportion of light over distance from its source. Thus if light travels 2 units, the illumination decreases by 1:2, and at 8 units decreases by 1:8. Inverse Square: Illumination decreases by the square of the distance from its source. Thus at 2 units distance, the decrease is 1:22 1:4, and at 8 units the decrease is 1:82 1:64. Colour: The colour of the light can be set: (a) By setting the Red, Green and Blue sliders in the Color area of the dialog. (b) Click on the Select Color button, followed by selection in the Color dialog which appears – shown in Fig. 19.3. (c) Click on the Select Indexed button, followed by selection in the Select Color dialog box which comes on screen. The selected color appears in the color swatch in the Color area of the dialog. Shadows: can be set on or off with clicks in a Shadows On check box. Some adjustments of shadows can be effected in the Shadow Options dialog, appearing with a click on the Shadows Options dialog in a lights dialog.

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 251

Rendering

251

Lighting icons

Each light placed in a drawing includes an icon and its name as shown in the three examples of Fig. 19.5. When working in the A3_template.dwt these icons appear as spots, which appear as icons when zoomed in a window.

Fig. 19.5 The light icons with their names

PT01

DT01

SPOT01

Examples of rendering First example – without added lights (Fig. 19.9)

1. Fig. 19.6 shows a 3D model which has been constructed from three parts acted upon by the tool Hide in the AutoCAD window. 2. Click on the Render tool icon in the Render toolbar, or enter render at the command line. The Render dialog appears (Fig. 19.7). 3. In the dialog click on the More Options . . . button. The Render Options dialog appears (Fig. 19.8). Click in the Phong radio button to set Phong render quality on. 4. Click the OK button of the dialog. The Render dialog reappears. 5. Click the Render button of the dialog. The 3D model scene renders (Fig. 19.9). Fig. 19.6 First example – Render – the 3D model to be rendered

Fig. 19.7 The Render dialog

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 252

252

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 19.8 The Render Options dialog

Note

The rendering has been lit by the default lighting – as if from behind and above the viewer. The rendering does not show the 3D quality expected of a rendering. Second example – with added lights (Fig. 19.12)

Fig. 19.9 First example – Render

1. At the command line enter re for Regen. The 3D model reverts to its un-rendered state. 2. Place the model in 3D Views/Top. Zoom to 1. If necessary call Pan, and pan the screen so that the 3D model is in the upper part of the AutoCAD window. 3. Click on Light tool icon in the Render toolbar, or enter light at the command line. The Lights dialog box appears (Fig. 19.3). 4. In the dialog click the New button. The New Point Light dialog appears. 5. In the dialog enter a suitable Light Name. In Fig. 19.4, the name PT01 has been entered. 6. In the dialog click the Modify button. The command line shows: Command:_light Enter light location current: enter .xy of click in the centre of the model (need Z) 600 The dialog box reappears, Click its OK button. 7. In the Lights dialog which reappears, select Distant Light from the New . . . popup list and click on the New . . . button. The New Distant Light dialog appears (Fig. 19.10). Enter a suitable name in the Light Name field. Then click the Modify button of the dialog. 8. The dialog disappears and the command line shows: Enter light direction TO current: .xy of click at the centre of the model (need Z) 200 Enter light direction FROM current: place light to the front and left of the model at a height of 600 units. 9. The dialog reappears. Click its OK button. The Lights dialog reappears. 10. In the dialog click the New . . . button again. Enter a new name for the second distant light and click the dialog’s Modify button. Place the second distant light in a TO position, the same as the first, with a

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:57 PM Page 253

Rendering

253

Fig. 19.10 Second example – the New Distant Light dialog

11. 12. Fig. 19.11 Second example – three light names in the Lights popup list

13. 14.

15.

FROM position at 350 units high at a point to the front and left of the model. Click the OK button of the dialog and when the Lights dialog appears, click its OK button as well. Note that there are now three light names in the dialog’s Lights list (Fig. 19.11). Place the model in the 3D Views/SW Isometric viewing position and Zoom the model in a window such that it is a reasonable size. Call Render and click the dialog’s Render button. The model renders, but it will be obvious that the lighting is of too great an intensity. Click the Lights tool icon and click on DT01 in the Lights list, followed by another click on the Modify button. In the New Distant Light dialog, adjust the Intensity to 0.5 with the slider, or by entering 0.5 in the Intensity field. Repeat for the DT02 light. Then adjust the intensity of the PT01 light to 200. Render again. If necessary adjust the light intensities again until satisfied with the resulting rendering.

Fig. 19.12 shows the resulting rendering. Compare with the rendering without added lights in Fig. 19.9. Third example – with added materials (Fig. 19.15)

1. Click the Materials Library tool icon in the Render toolbar. The dialog appears (Fig. 19.13). 2. From the materials list on the right-hand side of the dialog, select, in turn, the materials BRASS GIFMAP, CYAN METALLIC and METAL CHERRY RED. Preview each in turn to check whether they

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 254

254

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 19.12 Second example – Render

Fig. 19.13 Third example – the Materials Library

Fig. 19.14 Selecting Photo Raytrace

are suitable and click the Import button after each material has been previewed. Then click the OK button of the dialog. 3. Click the Materials tool icon in the Render toolbar. Click on BRASS GIFMAP in the Materials list. Then click the Attach button, followed by a click on the main part of the 3D model. Attach the material CYAN METALLIC to the upper part of the model and CHERRY RED METAL to the pin. 4. Call the Render dialog again and from the Rendering Type popup list click Photo Raytrace (Fig. 19.14). 5. Render the model again. The result is given in Fig. 19.15. Fourth example – shadows

Fig. 19.15 Third example – Render

1. In the New Distant Light dialogs for both distant lights, set Shadows on with a click in the Shadows check boxes. This involves a click on the Modify button of the Lights dialog after selecting each distant light in turn. 2. Click on the Render tool icon. In the dialog box set items as follows: Rendering Type – set to Photo Raytrace. Rendering Options – click in the Shadows check box to set shadows on. Then click on the More Options button. Photo Raytrace Render Options – in the dialog box which appears, click in the High Anti-aliasing radio button to set it on, followed by a click on the dialog’s OK button (Fig. 19.16). 3. Render the model.

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 255

Rendering

255

Notes

Fig. 19.16 The Photo Raytrace Render Options dialog

1. Anti-aliasing, available when rendering with Photo Real or Photo Raytrace, is a technique by which pixels can be shaded to avoid the appearance of jagged edges when rendering. The Render dialog offers four levels from Minimal to High. An even greater anti-aliasing effect can be gained by setting Contrast Threshold in the Adaptive Sampling area of the Photo Real or Photo Raytrace Render Options dialogs to a low figure (between 0.0 and 1.0). Fig. 19.17 shows the field set to 0.3 (the default setting). 2. The higher the anti-aliasing level the longer time rendering will take. The lower the threshold of contrast the longer will be the time taken in rendering a scene. Fifth example – scenes and backgrounds (Fig. 19.20)

Fig. 19.17 The Adaptive Sampling fields of the Photo Raytrace Options

1. Construct a 3D model – this example shows a simple garage with an up-and-open door, a window and a back door (Fig. 19.18). 2. Add suitable lighting and materials. 3. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. Zoom to a suitable size. 4. Click the Scenes tool icon in the Render toolbar. The Scenes dialog appears (Fig. 19.19). Click the New . . . button. 5. In the Scene Name of the dialog enter a suitable name – in this case SW_ISO and click the OK button. 6. Repeat items 4 and 5 with the model in a NW Isometric view.

Fig. 19.18 Fourth example – Render – the 3D model

7. Call the Render tool. Render then to Photo Raytrace, with Antialiasing set High and Contrast Threshold set to 0.0 (Fig. 19.20). 8. Click the Background tool icon. In the Background dialog (Fig. 19.21) click the Image radio button at the top of the dialog and click the Find File in the Image area at the bottom left of the dialog.

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 256

256

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 19.19 The Scenes dialog

Fig. 19.20 Fourth example – Render – first rendering

9. In the Background Image dialog which appears, click on the file sky.tga (Fig. 19.21). The name appears in the Name field of the Image area of the Background dialog. Click on the Preview button of the dialog and a preview of sky.tga appears in the Preview box. Click the OK button of the dialog, if satisfied this is the required background. 10. Zoom the model to a suitable size and render (Fig. 19.22).

Fig. 19.21 The Background dialog

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 257

Rendering

257

Fig. 19.22 Fourth example – Render – second rendering

Revision tips 1. Rendering is a process by which photographic-like coloured images from 3D model drawings can be produced on screen. 2. A complete rendering of a 3D model requires adding lighting to the scene in which the model was constructed and adding ‘materials’ to give the model reality. 3. Backgrounds can be added to a rendered scene if though advisable. 4. There are three main types of rendering – Render, Photo Real and Photo Raytrace. 5. Rendering can be time consuming particularly when large models are being rendered and this is despite the greatly increased speed of AutoCAD 2004 over previous releases of AutoCAD. 6. Four types of lighting can be added to a scene – Ambient (usually set to an Intensity of 30), Point, Distant and Spotlight. 7. There are three possible settings of the Attenuation for lights – None, Inverse Linear and Inverse Square. The default is Inverse Linear. 8. Shadows can be added to lights. The addition of shadows can give more reality to the rendering. 9. Take full advantage of Anti-aliasing to give the clearest rendered images. 10. When setting anti-aliasing a Contrast Threshold can be set to give higher definition to the rendering. 11. The higher anti-aliasing is set, the longer will be the time taken by the rendering process. The lower the contrast setting, the longer will be the time taken for rendering.

Exercises 1. Fig. 19.23 shows details of a small table and chair. Construct a 3D model of the table and four of the chairs. Add lighting and materials and render the scene. Fig. 19.24 shows a rendering of the models.

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 258

258

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Ø170

23

7.5

Ø20 Ø150 R2

Ø85

15

Ø80 5

15

30

25

5

205

10

R5

Fig. 19.23 Exercise 1 – orthographic projection

5

Ø15

Fig. 19.24 Exercise 1

2. Fig. 19.25 shows dimensioned orthographic projections of the six parts of the model shown in the rendering of Fig. 19.26. Construct 3D model drawings of the parts in positions similar to those shown in Fig. 19.26. Add suitable lighting and materials and render the resulting scene. 3. Fig. 19.27 gives details of the main body of the part. Fig. 19.28 gives details of the wheel and its spindle. The spindle is held by a collar and a pin. Construct a 3D model of the parts of the assembly in their correct position in relation to each other. When completed, add

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 259

Rendering

259

125 80

25

R12

240

50 95

20

20

R10

30

R5

Ø20 5 20

20 105

5

10

20

10

Fig. 19.25 Exercise 2 – orthographic projection

M10

20 30

30

35

10

230

Fig. 19.26 Exercise 2

40

R20 R20 20

R5

Holes are Ø20 Undimensioned fillets are R5

130

R10

25

25

5

5

Fig. 19.27 Exercise 3 – orthographic projection of the body

20 80

45 70

20 20 130

R20

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 260

260

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 10 R8

R8

Ø140

Ø30

Chamfer 3 × 3

Fig. 19.28 Exercise 3 – orthographic projection of the wheel and spindle

10

90

10 Hole Ø20

Fig. 19.29 Exercise 3

materials to the parts, set up a suitable lighting environment and render the assembly drawing (Fig. 19.29). As an additional exercise construct a profile-only drawing of the assembly such as that shown in Fig. 19.30.

An example of using Paper Space

Fig. 19.30 Exercise 3 – a profileonly view

1. In a Four:Equal viewport setting, construct an exploded 3D solid model drawing of the components shown in Fig. 19.31. 2. Add lights and materials and render each viewport in turn (Fig. 19.32). 3. Add two Layouts and rename the four Layouts as shown in Fig. 19.32. 4. Add a new layer VP of colour green. 5. Make a bitmap image from each of the viewports in turn. This is carried out as follows: (a) With the rendered drawing on screen press the keyboard key named Print Scrn.

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 261

Rendering

261

(b) Switch to Windows Paint application and Paste the screen dump into Paint. (c) Using the Paint tool Select window the rendering in the top lefthand viewport and select Copy from the Edit drop-down menu of Paint. (d) Select New from the File drop-down menu of Paint, and in the New window Paste the copied area.

Ø60

20

Hole Ø40

Ø50 15

R5 Ø60 45

Ø40 95 65

Ø30

60

R30 R20

5

45

R40

M15

R5

Fig. 19.31 Example of using Paper Space – orthographic projection

Fig. 19.32 Example of using Paper Space – renderings in all viewports

0750661763-ch019 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 262

262

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

(e) Go back into the AutoCAD 2004 window and click the tab named FRONT VIEW. The current viewport drawing appears. (f ) Turn the Layer VP off and Paste the bitmap from Paste into the Layout window. The result is shown on Fig. 19.33. 6. Repeat with the other three viewports. Fig. 19.34 shows the bottom right-hand viewport with its bitmap in the layout screen ISOMETRIC.

Fig. 19.33 The FRONT VIEW layout

Fig. 19.34 The ISOMETRIC layout

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 263

CHAPTER 20

3D surface models

Aims of this chapter 1. To introduce methods of constructing 3D surface models. 2. To give examples of 3D surface models using the tools from the Surfaces toolbar.

Introduction To call the Surfaces toolbar to screen, right-click on any toolbar already on screen and from the right-click list which appears left-click on Surfaces. The toolbar (Fig. 20.1) appears. 3D models can be constructed using the tools from the toolbar, but such models are different from those constructed using the Solids tools in that the models are 3D areas covered with surfaces and are in effect not solid models but surface-only models. This can be seen by comparing the tool icons from the two toolbars – Surfaces and Solids.

Fig. 20.1 The Surfaces toolbar

The first tool in the toolbar (2D Solid) is a 2D tool which can be used to construct 2D areas filled with solid colour. As I believe it to be easier to use the Solid hatch pattern to fill 2D areas, this tool is not explained in this chapter. An AutoCAD surface is a 3D mesh. The meshes can be plane surfaces such as those constructed when using the 3D Face, Box, Wedge or Pyramid tools. Or they can be a number of surfaces defined by their ‘density’ in terms of M and N vertices when surfaces are curved such as when tools such as the Cone, Sphere, Dome, Dish or Torus are used.

Examples of models using surface tools First example – 3D Face (Fig. 20.3) Fig. 20.2 The 3D Face tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the 3D Face tool, either with a click on its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.2) or enter 3dface at the command line which shows: 263

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 264

264

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

3. 4. 5. 6.

Command:_3dface Specify first point or [Invisible]: 60,80 Specify second point or [Invisible]: 270,80 Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: 270,200,200 Specify fourth point or [Invisible] create 3-sided face: 60,200,200 Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: right-click Command: Place in 3D Views/Right and Zoom to 1. With the Mirror tool, mirror the 3D face with the mirror line vertically through the top corner of the face on screen. Place in 3D Views/SW Isometric. Call 3D Face: Command:_3dface Specify first point or [Invisible]: end of pick the bottom left-hand corner of the triangular front Specify second point or [Invisible]: end of pick the top of the triangular front Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: end of pick the bottom right-hand corner of the triangular front Specify fourth point or [Invisible] create 3-sided face: right-click Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: right-click Command:

and the 3D surface model – left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.3 – is seen. Call Hide and the right-hand drawing of Fig. 20.3 is seen.

Fig. 20.3 First example – 3D Face

Second example – 3D Face (Fig. 20.7)

1. Place the screen in 3D Views/Front and Zoom to 1. 2. Call the 3D Face tool. The command line shows: Command:_3dface Specify first point or [Invisible]: 80,90 Specify second point or [Invisible]: 280,90 Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: 280,190 Specify fourth point or [Invisible] create 3-sided face: i (Invisible) Specify fourth point or [Invisible] create 3-sided face: 180,235 Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: i (Invisible) Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: 80,90

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 265

3D surface models

Fig. 20.4 Second example – 3D Face – the first 3D face

3.

4. Fig. 20.5 The Edge tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

5. 6.

265

Specify fourth point or [Invisible] create three-sided face: 180,90 Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: 80,190 Specify fourth point or [Invisible] create three-sided face: right-click Specify third point or [Invisible] exit: right-click Command: and the face given in Fig. 20.4 appears. Note the line across the face. Either click the Edge tool icon (Fig. 20.5) or enter edge Command:_edge Specify edge of 3dface to toggle invisibility or [Display]: pick the edge crossing the 3dface. Specify edge of 3dface to toggle invisibility or [Display]: right-click Command: and the unwanted edge disappears (Fig. 20.6). Place in 3D Views/Right and with the Copy tool copy the 3D face horizontally by 150 units. Place in 3D Views/SW Isometric and add 3D planes as indicated in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.7. Call Hide resulting in the right-hand drawing of Fig. 20.7.

Fig. 20.6 Second example – 3D Face – line removed with the Edge tool Fig. 20.7 Second example – 3D Face

Note

Note the use of the Invisible prompt of the 3D Face command line sequence. Note also the use of the Edge tool for deleting edges when using the Surfaces tools. Third example – Box (Fig. 20.9)

Fig. 20.8 The Box tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the Box tool – either click its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.8) or enter ai_box at the command line, which shows: Command:_ai_box Specify corner of box: 80,100 Specify length of box: 160 Specify width of box: 100

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 266

266

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Specify height of box: 80 Specify rotation of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: 0 Command: The left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.9 shows the result. 3. Call Hide. The right-hand drawing of Fig. 20.9 shows the result.

Fig. 20.9 Third example – Box

Fourth example – Wedge (Fig. 20.11)

Fig. 20.10 The Wedge tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the Wedge tool – either click its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.10) or enter ai_wedge at the command line, which shows: Command:_ai_wedge Specify corner point of wedge: 80,120 Specify length of wedge: 180 Specify width of wedge: 115 Specify height of wedge: 50 Specify rotation angle about the Z axis: 0 Command: The result is shown in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.11. 3. Call Hide. The result is given in the right-hand drawing of Fig. 20.11.

Fig. 20.11 Fourth example – Wedge

Fifth example – Pyramid (Fig. 20.13)

Fig. 20.12 The Pyramid tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the Pyramid tool – either click its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.12) or enter ai_pyramid at the command line, which shows: Command:_ai_pyramid Specify first corner for base of pyramid: 60,110

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 267

3D surface models

267

Specify second corner for base of pyramid: 180,110 Specify third corner for base of pyramid: 180,190 Specify fourth corner for base of pyramid: 60,190 Specify axis point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: enter x,y of 120,150 (need Z): enter 120 Command: 3. Place in 3D Views/SW Isometric. The left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.13 shows the result. 4. Call Hide. The right-hand drawing of Fig. 20.13 shows the result.

Fig. 20.13 Fifth example – Pyramid

Sixth example – Cone (Fig. 20.15)

When a 3D surface model is constructed which involves curves, the number of segments in the curved surface needs to be specified. With some of the tools, the number(s) need to be specified in the command line sequences prompts. In other cases the segments are determined by the settings of two variables SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2.

Fig. 20.14 The Cone tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the Cone tool – either click its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.14) or enter ai_cone at the command line, which shows: Command:_ai_cone Specify center point for base of cone: 150,115 Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: 55 Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] 0: right-click Specify height of cone: 120 Enter number of segments for surface of cone 16: right-click Command: 3. Place in 3D Views/SW Isometric. The left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.15 shows the result. 4. Call Hide. The right-hand drawing of Fig. 20.15 shows the result. Seventh example – Sphere (Fig. 20.17)

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the Sphere tool – either click its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.16) or enter ai_sphere at the command line, which shows:

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 268

268

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 20.15 Sixth example – Cone

Fig. 20.16 The Sphere tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

Command:_ai_sphere Specify center of sphere: 160,170 Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: 45 Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere 16: 24 Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere 16: 24 Command: 3. Place in 3D Views/SW Isometric. The left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.17 shows the result. The right-hand drawing shows the sphere after calling Hide.

Fig. 20.17 Seventh example – Sphere

Eighth example – Dome and Dish (Fig. 20.19)

Fig. 20.18 The Dome and Dish tool icons in the Surfaces toolbar

The command line sequences for these two tools (Fig. 20.18) are the same as for the Sphere tool. The dome and dish shown in Fig. 20.19 are both constructed with 16 segments to a radius of 50 units. The upper pair of drawings in Fig. 20.19 are domes, the right-hand showing the dome after calling Hide. The lower two drawings are dishes, the right-hand drawing being the dish after calling Hide. All four drawings show the surfaces in the 3D Views/SW Isometric viewing position.

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 269

3D surface models

269

Fig. 20.19 Eighth example – Dome and Dish

Ninth example – Torus (Fig. 20.21)

Fig. 20.20 The Torus tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

Fig. 20.21 Ninth example – Torus

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Call the Torus tool – either click its tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.20) or enter ai_torus at the command line, which shows: Command:_ai_torus Specify center point of torus: 180,160 Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: 60 Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: 8 Enter number of segments around tube circumference 16: right-click Enter number of segments around torus circumference 16: right-click Command: 3. Place in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. The left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.21 shows the result. The right-hand drawing shows the torus after calling Hide.

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 270

270

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Tenth example – Edge Surface (Fig. 20.24)

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Place the screen in the 3D Views/Right view and Zoom to 1. 3. Construct the two plines in Fig. 20.22. 115 85

R40

Fig. 20.22 Tenth example – Edge Surface – two plines

Fig. 20.23 The Edge Surface tool in the Surfaces toolbar

110

90

R20

135 175

4. Place the screen in UCS World. 5. With the Move tool move the inner pline 200 units to the left. 6. With the Line tool join the ends of the plines using the osnap endpoint to ensure accurate joining of the four objects – the two plines and the two lines. 7. Set the two variables SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 to 24 as follows: Command: enter surftab1 right-click Enter new value for SURFTAB1 6: 24 Command: 8. Call the Edge Surface tool with a click on its tool icon (Fig. 20.23). The command line shows: Command:_edgesurf Current wireframe density: SURFTAB1 24 SURFTAB2 24 Select object 1 for surface edge: pick one of the objects Select object 2 for surface edge: pick another of the objects Select object 3 for surface edge: pick another of the objects Select object 4 for surface edge: pick another of the objects Command: and the surface shown in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.24 forms. The right-hand drawing shows the surface after calling Hide.

Fig. 20.24 Tenth example – Edge Surface

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 271

3D surface models

271

Eleventh example – Revolved Surface (Fig. 20.27)

1. Open the A3_template.dwt. 2. Construct the pline outline in Fig. 20.25. 90 R15

5

5

20

Chamfer 5 × 5

20

60

35

Fig. 20.25 Eleventh example – Revolved Surface – pline outline

Fig. 20.26 The Revolved Surface tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

170

Axis of revolution

3. Click the Revolved Surface tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.26). The command line shows: Command:_revsurf Current wireframe density: SURFTAB1 24 SURFTAB2 24 Select object to revolve: pick the pline Select object that defines the axis of revolution: pick Specify start angle 0: right-click Specify included angle (ccw), cw) 360: right-click Command: and the surface of revolution forms as shown in the left-hand drawing of Fig. 20.27. The right-hand drawing shows the surface after calling Hide. 4. With the Erase tool erase the axis of revolution.

Fig. 20.27 Eleventh example – Revolved Surface

Polygon

Line 130 high

Fig. 20.28 Twelfth example – Tabulated Surface – basic drawing

Twelfth example – Tabulated Surface (Fig. 20.31)

1. Construct the polygon and line in Fig. 20.28. The line starts at 130,170 and ends at 130,170,130.

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 272

272

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Direction vector

Path curve

2. Place the drawing in 3D Views/SW Isometric (Fig. 20.29). 3. Click the Tabulated Surface tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.30). The command line shows: Command:_tabsurf Current wireframe density: SURFTAB1 6 Select objects for path curve: pick the polygon Select object for direction vector: pick Command: and the tabulated surface (left-hand drawing in Fig. 20.31) appears. The right-hand drawing shows the surface after calling Hide. 4. The direction vector can now be erased.

Fig. 20.29 Twelfth example – Tabulated Surface – the drawing of Fig. 13.28 in 3D Views/SW Isometric

Fig. 20.30 The Tabulated Surface tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar Fig. 20.31 Twelfth example – Tabulated Surface

Thirteenth example – Ruled Surface (Fig. 20.34)

Fig. 20.32 Thirteenth example – Ruled Surface – one of the curves

230

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Fig. 20.33 The Ruled Surface tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar

10

1. With the Polyline tool, construct the curved pline in Fig. 20.32.

Place the screen in the 3D Views/Front view. With the Copy tool copy the pline 180 units vertically upwards. Place the two plines in the 3D Views/SW Isometric view. Set Surftab1 to 24. Click the Ruled Surface tool icon in the Surfaces toolbar (Fig. 20.33). The command line shows: Command:_rulesurf Current wireframe density: SURFTAB1 24 Select first defining curve: pick one of the plines

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 273

3D surface models

273

Select second defining curve: pick the second pline Command: and the ruled surface given in Fig. 20.34 appears.

Fig. 20.34 Thirteenth example – Ruled Surface

Revision notes 1. The Surface tools can be used to construct surfaces which are 3D meshes. 2. All the Surface tools can be called from the command line by entering ai_ in front of the tool name. 3. Examples of these are: ai_edgesurf for the Edge Surface tool, ai_revsurf for the Revolved Surface tool, ai_tabsurf for the Tabulated Surface tool, ai_rulesurf for the Ruled Surface tool. 4. The Solids Editing Boolean operators Union, Subtract and Intersect do not work when constructing surfaces. 5. The settings of the two variables Surftab1 and Surftab2 are important when constructing surfaces involving curves. 15

R35

Square 90

Exercises The following exercises will require changing the 3D Views positions several times when working each drawing.

Fig. 20.35 Exercise 1

1. Fig. 20.35 is a two-view orthographic projection of an object consisting of a Box and a Dome. Construct the object using the two Surfaces tools. 2. Fig. 20.36 is a two-view orthographic projection of an object constructed with the Surfaces tools Box, Cone, Dome and Torus. Construct the surfaces model using these named tools. Fig. 20.37 shows the resulting surface after Hide has been called.

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 274

274

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Square 110

10

Cone radius 40 Top radius 40

45 60

Dome radius 40

Fig. 20.36 Exercise 2 – orthographic projection

Fig. 20.37 Exercise 2

3. Fig. 20.38 shows an open box formed from using the Surfaces tool 3D Face. The box is 160 long by 100 deep by 65 high. Construct the four sides and bottom of the box using the 3D face tool. 4. Fig. 20.39 is a third angle three-view orthographic projection of a casting constructed by using the tools Box, Wedge and Cone. Construct the surface drawing. Fig. 20.40 shows the resulting surface in a SW Isometric view. Try using the Edge tool to remove edges from the two cones. 5. Construct the pline in Fig. 20.41. With the Copy tool copy the pline a distance of 150 units from the original and form a ruled surface between the two plines. Fig. 20.42 shows the result. 6. Using four objects shaped as shown in Fig. 20.43, construct the Edgesurf surface in Fig. 20.44.

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 275

3D surface models

Fig. 20.38 Exercise 3

130

O30

200

Fig. 20.39 Exercise 4 – orthographic projection

Fig. 20.40 Exercise 4

40

25

50

275

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 276

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 10

276

Fig. 20.41 Exercise 5 – one of the defining curves

10

35

35

Fillets are R10

Fig. 20.42 Exercise 5

Fig. 20.43 Exercise 6 – the curves of the four objects

Fig. 20.44 Exercise 6

30

290

155

0750661763-ch020 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 277

3D surface models Square 120

277

7. Construct the drawing in Fig. 20.45, including the sloping line. With the Tabulated Surface tool form the tabulated surface shown in Fig. 20.46.

R20

Line from 210,180 to 270,180,75

Fig. 20.45 Exercise 7 – outline to be tabulated into a surface

Fig. 20.46 Exercise 7

Rendering surface models In the same way in which 3D solid model drawings can be rendered, so can those 3D models consisting of surfaces. So also can more complicated surface models be constructed in multiple viewport configurations.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 278

CHAPTER 21

More 3D solid models

Aims of this chapter 1. To give further practice in the construction of 3D solid model drawings. 2. To give further practice in constructing profile-only drawings. 3. To give further practice in the rendering of 3D solid model drawings.

First example (Fig. 21.10)

5

70

95

Axis of revolution

50

60

R10

5

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Open the template A3_template.dwt. Place in 3D Views/Front. Change layers to layer red. Construct the pline outline Fig. 21.1. Set ISOLINES to 24. With the Revolve tool construct a solid of revolution from the outline. 7. Place in the Right view. 8. Construct boxes and a cylinder as shown in Fig. 21.2.

15

Fig. 21.1 First example – first outline

2 boxes 180 × 90 × 55 Cylinder 180 × Ø50

Fig. 21.2 First example – the solid in Right view (item 8)

9. Place in Top view and move the boxes and cylinder to a position across the solid of revolution. 10. Subtract the boxes and cylinder from the solid of revolution and place in SW Isometric view (Fig. 21.3). 278

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 279

More 3D solid models

279

Fig. 21.3 First example – the solid at item 10

11. Place in Right view and construct an extrusion to the dimensions given in Fig. 21.4 to a height of 180.

35

R3

0

60

Fig. 21.4 First example – item 11

12. Place in Top view, move the extrusion to its correct position and subtract from the solid (Fig. 21.5). 13. Change layers to layer blue. 14. Place in the Right view and construct the pin and its washer from cylinder to the sizes given in Fig. 21.6. 15. Place in Top view and move the pin and its washer to positions as shown in the SE Isometric view given in Fig. 21.7. 16. Place in Front view and change layers to layer green. 17. Construct the polyline outline given in Fig. 21.8 and with Revolve, change the outline into a solid of revolution (Fig. 21.9). 18. Move the four parts of the assembly to positions as indicated in Fig. 21.9 and call Hide. Place in the SW Isometric viewing position and call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 21.10.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 280

280

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 21.5 First example – item 12

180

10

Ø50

Fig. 21.6 First example – the pin and its washer

Ø60

10

Fig. 21.7 First example – the pin and its washer in position

65

R20

60

5

130

Axis of revolution

95

Fig. 21.8 First example – outline for lower solid

Note

Fig. 21.10 shows the assembly after Hide and after being rendered. For details of rendering see Chapter 19.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 281

More 3D solid models

281

Fig. 21.9 First example – lower solid

Fig. 21.10 First example

First example after HIDE

First example after rendering

Second example Fig. 21.11 shows the dimensions of the two links forming parts of this assembly. Working to these dimensions: 1. Open the template A3_template.dwt. 2. Construct the outlines shown in Fig. 21.12, working to the dimensions given in Fig. 21.11. 3. Set ISOLINES to 20 and extrude as indicated in Fig. 21.12. Also construct the boxes as shown. 4. Place in the Front view and move the boxes to lie centrally to the extrusions in both links. Move the small link vertically by 5 units.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 282

282

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design R20 30

R20

30

190

10

210

Hole Ø30

50

Fig. 21.11 Second example – dimensions

5

20

5

Subtract cylinder from extrusion

Hole Ø30

40

Extrude to height 30

Box of height 10

Fig. 21.12 Second example – the extrusions

5

Box of height 10

Cylinder of height 20

5. Place in the SW Isometric view. Call Hide. 6. Unite the larger of the cylinders to the boxes in both links. Then subtract the smaller cylinders from the unions (Fig. 21.13). 7. Place in the Right view and construct boxes to form the slot in the larger link. Then place in the Top view, move the boxes to their correct positions relative to the link and subtract them from the link. 8. Fillet the corners of the larger link to a radius of 5. Fillet the corners of the smaller link to a radius of 3 and call Hide. Fig. 21.14 shows the result in the SW Isometric view. 9. Construct one of the pins from a cylinder and a box to the dimensions given in Fig. 21.11. Fillet the corners of the head of the pin. Join the two parts together with Union and copy to produce two pins. 10. In the Top view copy the smaller link so as to produce two smaller links.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 283

More 3D solid models

283

Fig. 21.13 Second example – the two links

Fig. 21.14 Second example – the completed links

11. Move and rotate the five parts to lie together. Place in the Front view and, if necessary move parts to lie in the correct vertical positions relative to each other. 12. Place in the SW Isometric view and call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 21.15.

Third example (Fig. 21.23) This example – a 3D model of a three-bed-roomed bungalow is somewhat more complicated than the first two. The construction is carried out in a variety of viewing positions. As the construction proceeds, save the resulting drawings to different filenames after each stage of the construction. Work in different layers for each wall, the roof and the windows. 1. Fig. 21.16 shows the dimensions to which the model is to be constructed in views from each side of the bungalow. Fig. 21.17 shows the outlines of the wall and two roof areas from which extrusions will be made. 2. In the Front view construct the outline of the East wall and its roof area. The roof is a closed pline, 2 units thick.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 284

284

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Second example after rendering

Second example after HIDE

Fig. 21.15 Second example

270 130

South wall North wall 260 190

190

Fig. 21.17 Third example – outlines of the walls and roof areas from which extrusions are to be constructed

35

East wall

38 70

80

80

35

38

57

150

Fig. 21.16 Third example – dimensions to which the walls and roof areas are to be constructed

120

105

West Wall

60

35 265

45 265

35

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 285

More 3D solid models

285

3. Extrude all parts of the wall to a height of 5 units. Subtract the window areas from the wall areas. Extrude the roof area to a height of 270 units. Save to a filename. 4. In the Back view, construct the outline of the West wall. Note there are two parts of this ‘wall’. Extrude all parts to a height of 5 units and subtract the window and main door extrusions from the ‘wall’ area. Save to a different filename. 5. Construct the outline of the South wall in the Left view. Note this is in two parts. Extrude the wall parts to a height of 5 units and the roof area to a height of 160 units. Save to a different filename. 6. Construct the outline of the North wall in the Right view. Extrude all parts to a height of 5 units and subtract the window rectangles from the ‘wall’ area. 7. Place in the Top view and with the Insert tool insert the other three walls and roof areas into the AutoCAD window. In the Top view, the screen should look somewhat like Fig. 21.18. 8. It will most likely be necessary to move the walls and the roof areas to their appropriate positions relative to each other as shown in Fig. 21.19.

Fig. 21.18 Third example – the four walls and roof areas in the Top view

9. Place the scene into the Front view to check that all parts are vertically in their correct positions relative to each other. 10. Place in the NW Isometric view. With Union join the walls to each other. Also union the two parts of the roof. Call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 21.20. Save the drawing to a new filename. 11. Construct the outlines of the three windows in the North wall on a new layer (Fig. 21.21). Extrude all parts of the windows to a height of 3 units and subtract the window glass areas from the main window outlines. 12. Add the sills and extrude to a height of 2 units.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 286

286

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 21.19 Third example – the walls and roof areas in their correct positions relative to each other

Fig. 21.20 Third example – the walls joined to each other. Roof areas joined

Fig. 21.21 Third example – first stage of the construction of the windows

13. Hide the layer containing the wall in the drawing and place the scene in the SW Isometric view. Call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 21.22. 14. Construct similar drawings in the West wall for the main door. 15. Repeat for the other walls.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 287

More 3D solid models

287

Fig. 21.22 Third example – the windows and cills of the North walls

16. Open the drawing containing the building drawing – walls and roof. Place in the Top view and with Insert, insert the various drawings of the walls and door. Constant use of the Zoom too will probably be necessary to obtain exact positions. 17. Using the Move tool, move the windows and door to their correct positions in the walls. Place in the Front view to check they are at their correct height. 18. Place in the NW Isometric view and call Hide. The result is given in Fig. 21.23. Do not unite the windows and door to the walls.

Fig. 21.23 Third example

Fourth example (Fig. 21.25) Fig. 21.24 shows view of the five parts of the assembly for this example. Each part is labelled A–E. 1. Open the template A3_template.dwt.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 288

288

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design 35 × Ø10

Ø5

40

Ø30

5

R10

20

20

D

E

25 Ø10

C R25

10 × 10

R5

Hole Ø20 B

A

Fig. 21.24 Fourth example – dimensioned views

15

140

5 R20

20

R15 35

Ø20

110

2. Place in the Right view and Zoom to 1. 3. Construct the front view of part A. Extrude its two parts to a height of 5. Extrude the square extrusion from the other extrusion. 4. In a different area of the screen construct the front view of part B. Extrude both parts to 20 high. Subtract the cylinder from the other extrusion. 5. In another area of the screen construct two cylinders and a box for the part C. Then construct the cylinders for parts D and E and subtract the inner cylinders from the outer cylinders. 6. Place in the Top view and Zoom to 1. Move the cylinders and the box of part C to their correct positions to each other and with Union join the parts together. Construct a cylinder for the hole of part C. 7. Construct the cylinders for the holes of parts D and E. 8. Construct the cylinders for the pins of parts D and E. 9. Place in the Front view and Zoom to 1. Move the cylinders for the holes of the parts C, D and E to their correct positions and subtract them from main bodies of the parts. 10. Move all parts to what is to be their positions with regard to each other in an exploded view. 11. Place in the Right view and check the positions of each part. Move if necessary. 12. Place in the SW Isometric view and Zoom to 1. 13. Construct a profile-only view of the assembly. The result is given in Fig. 21.25. Notes

1. It may be necessary to switch back to the Front and/or Right views to adjust the positions of the parts with regard to each other in order to obtain a good drawing. 2. Fig. 21.26 shows a profile-only drawing of the parts assembled fitted to each other. 3. Work in different layers for each part of the model.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 289

More 3D solid models

289

Fig. 21.25 Fourth example

Fig. 21.26 Fourth example – the parts fitted together

Fifth example (Fig. 21.29) Fig. 21.27 is a set of drawings showing dimensions for the five parts of this example – note there are two pins (Part D) to be constructed to the same dimension. To construct the exploded 3D model of the example: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Place the screen in the Front view and Zoom to 1. Construct a closed pline of the outline of the container Part A. Offset the pline by 5 units towards its inner side. Extrude the outer pline to 100 units and the inner pline to 90 units. Construct the outline and hole of the projection to the container, making sure the outline is a closed pline.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 290

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

R20

100

A

R20

30

R35

Holes Ø10

R50

D

45

30

290

R7.5 30

C

15

Hole Ø10

10

10 10 100

60

10 R7.5

Fig. 21.27 Fifth example – dimensioned drawings

B

70

5

70 120

6. Extrude the outline and the circle to a height of 10. Subtract the hole from the body. 7. Place in the Top view and Zoom to 1. 8. Move the inner extrusion of the container to be central to the outer extrusion and subtract the inner from the outer. 9. Move the projection to its upper position and copy to produce a second projection to the lower position. Unite the two extrusions to the container. 10. While in the Top view, construct the pline for the part B. Extrude to a height of 15. 11. Place in the SW Isometric view, Zoom window part B and fillet its edges to a radius of 21.5 units. 12. Place in the Front view and construct two cylinders of radius 5 and height 30. Change back to the Top view, move the cylinders to their correct position relative to the part B and subtract them from the body. 13. Return to the Front view, Zoom to 1, and construct the outline and the circles of the part C. Extrude all three to a height of 10. Subtract the holes from the body. 14. Place in the Top view and Zoom to 1. Construct cylinders for the two pins part D of radius 5 and height 30. 15. While in the Top view move the various parts of the exploded model to suitable positions relative to each other. Change to the Front view, zoom to 1 and check whether the relative positions are OK. 16. Place in the SW Isometric view and form a Setup Profile of the exploded model. Fig. 21.28 shows the result. 17. Undo the setup profile by repeatedly calling the Undo (entering u’s at command line). When back into the Front view save the model to a new filename.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 291

More 3D solid models

291

Fig. 21.28 Fifth example – exploded profile drawing

18. Working in Front and Top views move the parts of the model to lie in their correct positions relative to each other. 19. Place in the SW Isometric view and construct a Setup Profile drawing of the assembly. The result is given in Fig. 21.29.

Fig. 21.29 Fifth example

Exercises Illustrations for the following six exercises all include an orthographic projection together with a profile-only drawing of the resulting 3D model.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 292

292

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

For each exercise, following the details and dimensions contained in the orthographic projections, construct the required 3D model, followed by using the Setup Profile to obtain the profile-only drawing. 1. Fig. 21.30 shows details and dimensions for the exercise and Fig. 21.31 the profile-only drawing of the model. Construct a 3D model working to the details given in Fig. 21.30 and produce a profile-only drawing from your 3D model drawing. 50

Hole Ø50

10

10

Ø50

Ø70

100

Ø200

10

Ø70

Fig. 21.30 Exercise 1 – orthographic projection

2. Working to the details given in Fig. 21.32, construct an exploded 3D model from which the Setup Profile model in Fig. 21.33 can be derived. Square hole 20 × 20

60

Base

35

R30

145

30

10

Hole Ø10

Fig. 21.31 Exercise 1

Hole Ø30

Pin

75

220

Ø40

10

Fig. 21.32 Exercise 2 – orthographic projection

65

R10

Sleeve

50

Ø30

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 293

More 3D solid models

293

Fig. 21.33 Exercise 2

3. Working to the details given in Fig. 21.34, construct the 3D model from which the profile drawing in Fig. 21.35 was obtained.

5

220 60

Ø40

30

10

15 5

Ø20

Ø30

60

Holes Ø20 R20

60

Fig. 21.34 Exercise 3 – orthographic projection

Fig. 21.35 Exercise 3

4. Fig. 21.36 shows details and dimensions from which the exploded profile drawing given in Fig. 21.37 was obtained. Construct the 3D model, working to the details of Fig. 21.36 and obtain the profile drawing from your model.

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 294

294

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design Pins 30 × Ø10

Holes Ø7.5 Ø20

Ø30

R20 60

20

R35

Fig. 21.36 Exercise 4 – orthographic projection

180

120

15

Fig. 21.37 Exercise 4

5. Fig. 21.38 shows details and dimensions from which the exploded profile drawing in Fig. 21.39 was obtained. Construct the 3D model, working to the details of Fig. 21.38 and obtain the profile drawing from your model.

Holes Ø20

5

R20

15

55

R10

190

Fig. 21.38 Exercise 5 – orthographic projection

65

R10

65

Ø30

Holes Ø20

50

305

50

0750661763-ch021 1/12/04 4:58 PM Page 295

More 3D solid models

295

Fig. 21.39 Exercise 5

6. With the details given in Fig. 21.40, construct the profile drawing given in Fig. 21.41.

100

Ø30

10

15

Ø50 Ø20

25

Ø15

102.5

50

7.5

Ø40

50

10

Fig. 21.40 Exercise 6 – orthographic projection

Fig. 21.41 Exercise 6

30

10

0750661763-ch022 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 296

CHAPTER 22

Internet tools

Aims of this chapter The purpose of this chapter is to introduce the tools which are available in AutoCAD 2004 which make use of facilities available on the World Wide Web (www).

Emailing drawings As with any other files which are composed of data, AutoCAD drawings can be sent by email as attachments. If a problem of security of the drawings is involved they can be encapsulated with a password as the drawings are saved prior to being attached in an email. To encrypt a drawing with a password, click Tools in the Save Drawing As dialog and from the popup list which appears click Security Options . . . (Fig. 22.1). Then in the Security Options dialog which appears (Fig. 22.2) enter a password in the Password or phrase to open this drawing field, followed by a click on the OK button. The drawing then cannot be opened until the password is entered in the Password dialog (Fig. 22.3) which appears when an attempt is made to open the drawing by the person receiving the email. There are many reasons why drawings may require to be passwordencapsulated in order to protect confidentiality of the contents of drawings.

Fig. 22.1 Selecting Security Options in the Save Drawing As dialog

Example – creating a web page (Fig. 22.5) To create a web page which includes AutoCAD drawings left-click Publish to Web . . . from the File drop-down menu. A series of Publish to Web dialogs appear (Fig. 22.4). After making entries in the dialogs which come on screen after each Next button is clicked, the Preview of the resulting web page 296

0750661763-ch022 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 297

Internet tools

Fig. 22.2 Entering a password in the Security Options dialog

Fig. 22.3 The Password dialog appearing when a password encrypted drawing is about to be opened

Fig. 22.4 One of the Publish to Web dialogs

297

0750661763-ch022 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 298

298

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

such as that shown in Fig. 22.5 (which can be saved as an *.htm file) appears. A click in any of the thumbnail views and an Internet Explorer page appears showing the selected drawing in full (Fig. 22.6).

Fig. 22.5 A Preview of a web page

Fig. 22.6 The thumbnail in a Preview showing as a Microsoft Explorer page

In this example the thumbnails are from DWF files (Design Web Format files). If a web page includes DWF files they can be opened in the Autodesk Express Viewer which is part of the AutoCAD 2004 software package. Fig. 22.7 shows a DWF file opened in the Express Viewer.

0750661763-ch022 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 299

Internet tools

299

Fig. 22.7 A DWF file opened in the AutoCAD Express Viewer

Browsing the Web There are several ways in which Autodesk web pages can be opened from AutoCAD 2004. A click on Help in the menu bar followed by another click on Online Resources in the drop-down menu, and the sub-menu (Fig. 22.8) appears. Each of the items in this sub-menu brings an

Fig. 22.8 The Online Resources sub-menu of the Help drop-down menu

Fig. 22.9 Selecting Browse the Web from the Web toolbar

Autodesk web page to screen. As an example a click on the bottom item in the sub-menu and the web page comes to screen. Selection of other items in the sub-menu brings up other Autodesk web pages. Selecting Browse the Web from the Web toolbar (Fig. 22.9) also brings up an Autodesk web page (Fig. 22.10). If Express Tools have been loaded with AutoCAD 2004, another method of bringing an Autodesk web page to screen is to select Web Links from the Express drop-down menu (Fig. 22.11) and from the submenu which appears, click on Autodesk Products and Support Website.

0750661763-ch022 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 300

300

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. 22.10 The Autodesk Users Group web page

Fig. 22.11 Selecting Autodesk Products and Support Website from the Express drop-down menu

The eTransmit tool Click eTransmit . . . in the File drop-down menu and the Create Transmittal dialog appears (Fig. 22.12). The transmittal shown in this example is the drawing on screen at the time. Fill in details as necessary and click the OK button and the necessary email shown in the Transmittal dialog given in Fig. 22.13 appears ready to be sent. Note the file is being sent as an *.exe file, from which the AutoCAD drawing can be extracted by the person receiving the transmittal.

0750661763-ch022 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 301

Internet tools

Fig. 22.12 The Create Transmittal dialog

Fig. 22.13 An email in the Transmittal dialog

301

0750661763-ch023 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 302

CHAPTER 23

Design and AutoCAD 2004

Ten reasons for using AutoCAD 1. A CAD software package such as AutoCAD 2004 can be used to produce any form of technical drawing. 2. Technical drawings can be produced much more speedily using AutoCAD that when working by any ‘hand’ methods – probably as much as ten times as quickly when used by skilled AutoCAD operators. 3. Drawing with AutoCAD is less tedious than drawing by hand – features such as hatching, lettering, adding notes, etc. are easier, quicker and indeed more accurate. 4. Drawings or parts of drawings can be moved, copied, scaled, rotated, mirrored and inserted into other drawings without having to redraw. 5. AutoCAD drawings can be saved to a file system without necessarily having to print the drawing. This can save the need for large drawing-storage areas. 6. The same drawing or part of a drawing need never be drawn twice, because it can be copied or inserted into other drawings with ease. A basic rule when working with AutoCAD is – Never draw the same feature twice. 7. New details can be added to drawings or be changed within drawings without having to mechanically erase the old detail. 8. Dimensions can be added to drawings with accuracy reducing the possibility of making errors. 9. Drawings can be plotted or printed to any scale without having to redraw. 10. Drawings can be exchanged between computers and/or emailed around the world without having to physically send the drawing.

The place of AutoCAD 2004 in designing The contents of this book are only designed to allow those who have a limited (or no) knowledge and skills of the construction of technical drawings using AutoCAD 2004. However it needs to be recognised that the impact of modern computing on the methods of designing in industry has been immense. Such features as analysis of stresses, shear forces, bending forces and the like can be carried out more quickly and accurately using computing methods. The storage of data connected with a design and the ability to recover the data speedily are carried out much easier using computing methods than prior to the introduction of computing. 302

0750661763-ch023 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 303

Design and AutoCAD 2004

303

AutoCAD 2004 can play an important part in the design process because technical drawings of all types are necessary for achieving well-designed artefacts whether it be an engineering component, a machine, a building, an electronics circuit or any other design project. In particular, 2D drawings which can be constructed in AutoCAD 2004 are still of great value in modern industry. AutoCAD 2004 can also be used to produce excellent and accurate 3D models, which can be rendered to produce photographic-like images of a suggested design. Although not dealt with in this book, data from 3D solid model drawings constructed in AutoCAD 2004 can be taken for use in computer aided machining (CAM). At all stages in the design process, either (or both) 2D or 3D drawings can play an important part to aid the people engaged in designing to assist them in assessing the results of their work at various stages. It is in this process that drawings constructed in AutoCAD 2004 play an important part. In the simplified design process chart shown in Fig. 23.1 an asterisk (*) has been shown against those features where the use of AutoCAD 2004 can be regarded as being of value. The design chart (Fig. 23.1)

The simplified design chart in Fig. 23.1 shows the following features: Design brief: A design brief is a necessary feature of the design process. It can be in the form of a statement, but it is usually much more. A design brief can be a written report in which not only is a statement made of the problem which the design is assumed to be solving, but includes preliminary notes and drawings describing difficulties which may be encountered in solving the design and may include charts, drawings, costings, etc. to emphasise some of the needs in solving the problem for which the design is being made. Research: The need to research the various problems which may arise when designing is often much more demanding than what the chart (Fig. 23.1) shows. For example the materials being used may require extensive research as to costing, stress analysis, electrical conductivity, difficulties in machining or in constructional techniques and other such features. Ideas for solving the brief: This is where technical and other drawing and sketches play an important part in designing. It is, after research has been carried out, where designers can ensure the brief is being met bearing in mind the research that has preceded the ideas for the solution. Models: These may be constructed models in materials representing the actual materials which have been chosen for the design, but in addition 3D solid model drawings such as those which can be constructed in AutoCAD 2004, can be of value. Some models may also be made in the materials from which the final design is to be made so as to allow testing of the materials in the design situation. Chosen solution: This is where the use of drawings constructed in AutoCAD 2004 are of great value. 2D and 3D drawings come into

0750661763-ch023 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 304

304

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

*

The problem to be solved Preliminary drawings Purpose Methods

DESIGN BRIEF

RESEARCH

Planning

IDEAS FOR * Sketches SOLVING BRIEF * Drawings * Notes with drawings Are they required? For display Tests

Fig. 23.1 A simplified design chart

MODELS CHOSEN SOLUTION

Notes with drawings* Statement with drawings* Specification with drawings* Materials Costs

Shape and form* Proportions* Drawings*

Graphics* 3D solid model drawings* Technical drawings*

* Graphics

REALISATION

Tests

* Reports

EVALUATION

Notes (including drawings)*

their own here. It is from such drawings that the final design will be manufactured. Realisation: The design is made. There may be a need to manufacture a number of designs in order to enable evaluation of the design to be fully assessed. Evaluation: The manufactured design is tested in situations such as it is liable to be placed in use. Reports and notes which may well include drawings and suggestions for amendments to the working drawings from which the design was realised.

Enhancements in AutoCAD 2004 The enhancements of AutoCAD 2004 over the previous release AutoCAD 2002 include the following. It should be noted that details of many of these are not described in this introductory book. 1. New DWG and DXF file formats which allow increased speed of loading files in these formats. 2. New DWF format allowing exchange of drawings between systems. 3. Palettes, of which the DesignCenter and Properties palettes are examples. Right-click in a palette on screen and from the right-click menu, items allow new palettes and changes to existing palettes. The command window is now in palette form. When the command window is dragged from its usual position at the base of the AutoCAD window, it changes to a palette.

0750661763-ch023 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 305

Design and AutoCAD 2004

305

4. Transparency which can be applied to palettes in order that constructions can be carried on while a palette is on screen and has been made transparent yet can still be used. 5. A right-click menu to the status bar allows the operator to control what is included in the bar. 6. New Mtext dialog and window. 7. Express tools can now be loaded from the AutoCAD 2004 CD without extra charges being incurred. Many more express tools – some of the previous express tools have been incorporated in other toolbars. 8. External References – New methods have greatly improved their use. 9. Revcloud which allows features in a drawing to be emphasised is now a standard tool. 10. Undo and Redo – Multiple undos and redos are now possible. 11. True Colour and Pantone colour tones have been included. 12. Renderings can now be plotted/printed from Paper Space or Model Space. 13. Communication Center – updates can now be taken from the Internet – the communication centre automatically brings up a ‘bubble’ in the window advising of updates of the software. 14. Security – drawings can now be safeguarded with a password through a new security system. 15. AutoCAD 2004 is fully Windows XP compliant. 16. The AutoCAD Today window no longer appears when AutoCAD 2004 is opened. 17. Publish updated. Now possible to construct a single HTM file containing many drawings.

System requirements for running AutoCAD 2004 Operating system: Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home or Windows 2000. RAM: At least 128 MB. Monitor screen: 1024 768 VGA with True Colour as a minimum. Hard disk: A minimum of 300 MB.

0750661763-App01 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 306

APPENDIX A

Printing and plotting

Introduction Plotters or printers can be selected from a wide range of different types for printing or plotting drawings constructed in AutoCAD 2004. The example given in this appendix has been from a print using one of the default printers connected to the computer I am using. However if another plotter or printer is connected to the computer, its driver can be set by first opening the Windows Control Panel and with a double-click on the Autodesk Plotter Manager the Plotters dialog appears (Fig. A.1).

Fig. A.1 The Plotters window

Another double-click on the Add-A-Plotter-Wizard icon and the Add Plotter series of dialogs appears. Click the Next buttons of the dialogs as they appear until the Add Plotter – Plotter Model dialog comes on screen. Click on any of the names in the Manufacturers list and the names of the plotters/printers and a selection can be made from the available model names in the Models lists. Fig. A.2 shows some of the models available from Hewlett-Packard. Plots or prints from drawings constructed in AutoCAD 2004 can be made either from Model Space or from Paper Space. There is a slight difference between the Plot dialogs in the two, but this makes no difference to the methods of plotting or printing. 306

0750661763-App01 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 307

Printing and plotting

307

Fig. A.2 Selecting a printer or plotter can be made from the Add Plotter dialog

An example of a printout 1. Either select Plot . . . from the File drop-down menu (Fig. A.3) or click the Plot tool icon in the Standard toolbar (Fig. A.4). The Plot dialog appears (Fig. A.5). 2. There are two sub-dialogs of the dialog chosen with clicks on either the Plot Device tab or the Plot Settings tab. First, click the Plot Device tab, followed by another in the Name field. From the popup list select an appropriate plotter or printer (Fig. A.5).

Fig. A.3 Selecting Plot . . . from the File drop-down menu

0750661763-App01 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 308

308

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Fig. A.4 The Plot tool icon in the Standard toolbar

Fig. A.5 The Plot Device sub-dialog of the Plot dialog

3. Then click the Plot Settings tab and in the sub-dialog make appropriate settings for the size of paper and Drawing orientation (Fig. A.6). 4. Click the Window button, the dialog disappears. Window the drawing and the dialog reappears.

Fig. A.6 The Plot Settings sub-dialog of the Plot dialog

0750661763-App01 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 309

Printing and plotting

309

5. Click the Preview button and a preview window appears showing the drawing as it will be printed or plotted on the paper in the print/plot machine (Fig. A.7). 6. If satisfied the print is correctly placed on the paper. Right-click and click again on Plot in the menu which appears. The drawing prints.

Fig. A.7 The Plot Preview window with its right-click menu

0750661763-App02 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 310

APPENDIX B

List of tools

Introduction AutoCAD 2004 allows the use of nearly 300 tools. Some operators prefer using the word ‘commands’, although command as an alternative to tool is not in common use today. The majority of these tools are described in this list. Many of the tools described here have not been used in this book, because this book is an introductory text designed to initiate readers into the basic methods of using AutoCAD 2004. It is hoped the list will encourage readers to experiment with those tools not described in the book. The abbreviations for tools which can be abbreviated are included in brackets after the tool name. Tool names can be entered in upper or lower case. The list of 2D tools is followed by a listing of 3D tools. Internet tools are described at the end of this listing.

2D tools ABOUT – Brings the About AutoCAD bitmap on screen ADCENTER – Brings the DesignCenter palette on screen APPLOAD – Brings the Load/Unload Applications dialog to screen ARC (A) – Creates an arc AREA – States in square units the area selected from a number of points ARRAY (AR) – Creates Rectangular or Polar arrays in 2D ASE – Brings the dbConnect Manager on screen ATTDEF – Brings the Attribute Definition dialog on screen ATTEDIT – Allows editing of attributes from the Command line AUDIT – Checks and fixes any errors in a drawing BHATCH (H) – Brings the Boundary Hatch dialog on screen BLOCK – Brings the Block Definition dialog on screen BMAKE (B) – Brings the Block Definition dialog on screen BMPOUT – Brings the Create Raster File dialog BOUNDARY (BO) – Brings the Boundary Creation dialog on screen BREAK (BR) – Breaks an object into parts CAL – For the calculation of mathematical expressions CHAMFER (CHA) – Creates a chamfer between two entities CHPROP (CH) – Brings the Properties window on screen CIRCLE (C) – Creates a circle 310

0750661763-App02 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 311

List of tools

311

COPY (CO) – Creates single or multiple copies of selected entities COPYCLIP (CtrlC) – Copies a drawing, or part of a drawing, for inserting into a document from another application COPYLINK – Forms a link between an AutoCAD drawing and its appearance in another application such as a word processing package CUSTOMIZE – Brings the Customize dialog to screen, allowing the customisation of toolbars, palettes, etc. DBLIST – Creates a database list in a Text window for every entity in a drawing DDATEXT – Brings the Attribute Extraction dialog on screen DDATTDEF (AT) – Brings the Attribute Definition dialog to screen DDATTE (ATE) – Edits individual attribute values DDCOLOR (COL) – Brings the Select Color dialog on screen DDEDIT (ED) – Select text, and the Text Formatting dialog box appears DDIM (D) – Brings the Dimension Style Manager dialog box on screen DDINSERT (I) – Brings the Insert dialog on screen DDMODIFY – Brings the Properties window on screen DDOSNAP (OS) – Brings the Drafting Settings dialog on screen DDPTYPE – Brings the Point Style dialog on screen DDRMODES – Brings the Drafting Settings dialog on screen DDUNITS (UN) – Brings the Drawing Units dialog on screen DDVIEW (V) – Brings the View dialog on screen DEL – Allows a file (any file) to be deleted DIM – Starts a session of dimensioning DIM1 – Allows the addition of a single dimension to a drawing DIST (DI) – Measures the distance between two points in coordinate units DIVIDE (DIV) – Divides an entity into equal parts DONUT (DO) – Creates a donut DSVIEWER – Brings the Aerial View window on screen DTEXT (DT) – Creates dynamic text. Text appears in drawing area as it is entered DXBIN – Brings the Select DXB File dialog on screen DXFIN – Brings the Select File dialog on screen DXFOUT – Brings the Save Drawing As dialog on screen ELLIPSE (EL) – Creates an ellipse ERASE (E) – Erases selected entities from a drawing EXIT – Ends a drawing session and closes AutoCAD 2004 EXPLODE (X) – Explodes a block or group into its various entities EXPLORER – Brings the Windows Explorer on screen EXPORT (EXP) – Brings the Export Data dialog on screen EXTEND (EX) – To extend an entity to another FILLET (F) – Creates a fillet between two entities FILTER – Brings the Object Selection Filters dialog on screen GROUP (G) – Brings the Object Grouping dialog on screen HATCH – Allows hatching by the entry responses to prompts

0750661763-App02 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 312

312

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

HATCHEDIT (HE) – Allows editing of associative hatching HELP – Brings the AutoCAD 2004 Help: User Documentation dialog on screen HIDE (HI) – To hide hidden lines in 3D models ID – Identifies a point on screen in coordinate units IMAGEADJUST (IAD) – Allows adjustment of images IMAGEATTACH (IAT) – Brings the Select Image File dialog on screen IMAGECLIP – Allows clipping of images IMPORT – Brings the Import File dialog on screen INSERT (I) – Brings the Inert dialog on screen INSERTOBJ – Brings the Insert Object dialog on screen ISOPLANE (Ctrl/E) – Sets the isoplane when constructing an isometric drawing LAYER (LA) – Brings the Layer Properties Manager dialog on screen LAYOUT – Allows editing of layouts LENGTHEN (LEN) – Lengthen an entity on screen LIMITS – Sets the drawing limits in coordinate units LINE (L) – Creates a line LINETYPE (LT) – Brings the Linetype Manager dialog on screen LIST (LI) – Lists in a text window details of any entity or group of entities selected LOAD – Brings the Select Shape File dialog on screen LTSCALE (LTS) – Allows the linetype scale to be adjusted MEASURE (ME) – Allows measured intervals to be placed along entities MENU – Brings the Select Menu File dialog on screen MENULOAD – Brings the Menu Customization dialog on screen MIRROR (MI) – Creates an identical mirror image to selected entities MLEDIT – Brings the Multiline Edit Tools dialog on screen MLINE (ML) – Creates mlines MLSTYLE – Brings the Multiline Styles dialog on screen MOVE (M) – Allows selected entities to be moved MSLIDE – Brings the Create Slide File dialog on screen MSPACE (MS) – When in PSpace changes to MSpace MTEXT (MT or T) – Brings the Multiline Text Editor on screen MVIEW (MV) – To make settings of viewports in Paper Space MVSETUP – Allows drawing specifications to be set up NEW (CtrlN) – Brings the Select template dialog on screen NOTEPAD – For editing files from the Windows 95 Notepad OFFSET (O) – Offsets select entity by a stated distance OOPS – Cancels the effect of using Erase OPEN – Brings the Select File dialog on screen OPTIONS – Brings the Options dialog to screen ORTHO – Allows ortho to be set ON/OFF OSNAP (OS) – Brings the Drafting Settings dialog to screen PAGESETUP – Brings either the Page Setup Model or Page Setup – Layout1 dialog to screen for setting print/plot parameters PAN (P) – Pans the AutoCAD 2004 drawing editor in any direction PBRUSH – Brings Windows Paint on screen

0750661763-App02 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 313

List of tools

313

PEDIT (PE) – Allows editing of polylines. One of the options is Multiple allowing continuous editing of polylines without closing the command PLINE (PL) – Creates a polyline PLOT (CtrlP) – Brings the Plot dialog to screen POINT (PO) – Allows a point to be placed on screen POLYGON (POL) – Creates a polygon POLYLINE (PL) – Creates a polyline PREFERENCES – Brings the Options dialog on screen PREVIEW (PRE) – Brings the print/plot preview box on screen PROPERTIES (PR) – Brings the Properties palette on screen PSFILL – Allows polylines to be filled with patterns PSOUT – Brings the Create Postscript File dialog on screen PURGE (PU) – Purges unwanted data from a drawing before saving to file QSAVE – Quicksave. Saves the drawing file to its current name in AutoCAD 2004 format QUIT – Ends a drawing session and closes down AutoCAD 2004 RAY – A construction line from a point RECOVER – Brings the Select File dialog on screen to allow recovery of selected drawings as necessary RECTANG (REC) – Creates a pline rectangle REDEFINE – If an AutoCAD command name has been turned off by Undefine turns the command name back on REDO – Cancels the last Undo REDRAW (R) – Redraws the contents of the AutoCAD 2004 drawing area REDRAWALL (RA) – Redraws the whole of a drawing REGEN (RE) – Regenerates the contents of the AutoCAD 2004 drawing area REGENALL (REA) – Regenerates the whole of a drawing REGION (REG) – Creates a region from an area within a boundary RENAME (REN) – Brings the Rename dialog on screen REPLAY – Brings the Replay dialog on screen from which bitmap image files can be selected SAVE (CtrlS) – Brings the Save Drawing As dialog box on screen SAVEAS – Brings the Save Drawing As dialog box on screen SAVEIMG – Brings the Save Image dialog on screen SCALE (SC) – Allows selected entities to be scaled in size – smaller or larger SCRIPT (SCR) – Brings the Select Script File dialog on screen SETVAR (SET) – Can be used to bring a list of the settings of set variables into an AutoCAD Text window SHAPE – Inserts an already loaded shape into a drawing SHELL – Allows MS-DOS commands to be entered SKETCH – Allows freehand sketching SOLID (SO) – Creates a filled outline in triangular parts SPELL (SP) – Brings the Check Spelling dialog on screen

0750661763-App02 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 314

314

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

SPLINE (SPL) – Creates a spline curve through selected points SPLINEDIT (SPE) – Allows the editing of a spline curve STATS – Brings the Statistics dialog on screen STATUS – Shows the status (particularly memory use) in a Text window STRETCH (S) – Allows selected entities to be stretched STYLE (ST) – Brings the Text Styles dialog on screen TABLET (TA) – Allows a tablet to be used with a pointing device TBCONFIG – Brings the Customize dialog on screen to allow configuration of a toolbar TEXT – Allows text from the Command line to be entered into a drawing THICKNESS (TH) – Sets the thickness for the Elevation command TILEMODE – Allows settings to enable Paper Space TOLERANCE – Brings the Geometric Tolerance dialog on screen TOOLBAR (TO) – Brings the Toolbars dialog on screen TRIM (TR) – Allows entities to be trimmed up to other entities TYPE – Types the contents of a named file to screen UNDEFINE – Suppresses an AutoCAD command name UNDO (U) (CtrlZ) – Undoes the last action of a tool VIEW – Brings the View dialog on screen VPLAYER – Controls the visibility of layers in Paper Space VPORTS – Brings the Viewports dialog on screen VSLIDE – Brings the Select Slide File dialog on screen WBLOCK (W) – Brings the Create Drawing File dialog on screen WMFIN – Brings the Import WMF File dialog on screen WMFOPTS – Brings the Import Options dialog on screen WMFOUT – Brings the Create WMF dialog on screen XATTACH (XA) – Brings the Select Reference File dialog on screen XLINE – Creates a construction line XREF (XR) – Brings the Xref Manager dialog on screen ZOOM (Z) – Brings the Zoom tool into action

3D tools 3DARRAY – Creates an array of 3D models in 3D space 3DFACE (3F) – Creates a 3- or 4-sided 3D mesh behind which other features can be hidden 3DMESH – Creates a 3D mesh in 3D space 3DORBIT (3DO) – Allows manipulation of 3D models on screen 3DSIN – Brings the 3D Studio File Import dialog on screen 3DSOUT – Brings the 3D Studio Output File dialog on screen ALIGN – Allows selected entities to be aligned to selected points in 3D space AMECONVERT – Converts AME solid models (from Release 12) into AutoCAD 2004 solid models BOX – Creates a 3D solid box CONE – Creates a 3D model of a cone CYLINDER – Creates a 3D cylinder DDUCS (UC) – Brings the UCS dialog on screen

0750661763-App02 1/12/04 5:23 PM Page 315

List of tools

315

EDGESURF – Creates a 3D mesh surface from four adjoining edges EXTRUDE (EXT) – Extrudes a closed polyline INTERFERE – Creates an interference solid from selection of several solids INTERSECT (IN) – Creates an intersection solid from a group of two or more solids LIGHT – Brings the Lights dialog on screen MATLIB – Brings the Materials Library dialog on screen MIRROR3D – Mirrors 3D models in 3D space in selected directions MVIEW (MV) – When in PSpace brings in MSpace objects PFACE – Allows the construction of a 3D mesh through a number of selected vertices PLAN – Allows a drawing in 3D space to be seen in plan (UCS World) PSPACE (PS) – Changes MSpace to PSpace RENDER – Brings the Render dialog on screen REVOLVE (REV) – Forms a solid of revolution from outlines REVSURF – Creates a solid of revolution from a pline RMAT – Brings the Materials dialog on screen RPREF (RPR) – Brings the Rendering Preferences dialog on screen RULESURF – Creates a 3D mesh between two entities SCENE – Brings the Scenes dialog on screen SECTION (SEC) – Creates a section plane in a 3D model SHADE (SHA) – Shades a selected 3D model SLICE (SL) – Allows a 3D model to be cut into several parts SOLPROF – Creates a profile from a 3D solid model drawing SPHERE – Creates a 3D solid model sphere STLOUT – Saves a 3D model drawing in ASCII or binary format SUBTRACT (SU) – Subtracts one 3D solid from another TABSURF – Creates a 3D solid from an outline and a direction vector TORUS (TOR) – Allows a 3D torus to be created UCS – Allows settings of the UCS plane UNION (UNI) – Unites 3D solids into a single solid VPOINT – Allows viewing positions to be set from x,y,z entries VPORTS – Brings the Viewports dialog on screen WEDGE (WE) – Creates a 3D solid in the shape of a wedge

Internet tools BROWSER – Brings www.autodesk.com page on screen ETRANSMIT – Brings the Create Transmittal dialog to screen PUBLISH – Brings the Publish to Web dialog to screen

0750661763-App03 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 316

APPENDIX C

Some set variables

Introduction AutoCAD 2004 settings are controlled by a large number of variables, many of which are set when making entries in dialogs. Many are also set or read-only variables depending upon the configuration of AutoCAD 2004 when it was originally set up (default values). The following is a list of those set variables which are of interest in that they often require setting by entering figures or letters at the command line. To set a variable, enter its name at the command line and respond to the prompts which arise. To see all set variables, enter set (or setvar) at the command line: Command: enter set right-click SETVAR Enter variable name or ?: enter ? Enter variable name to list *: right-click and a Text window opens showing a first window with a list of the first of the variables. To continue with the list press the Return key when prompted and at each press of the Return key another window opens.

Some of the set variables ANGDIR – Sets angle direction. 0 counterclockwise; 1 clockwise APERTURE – Sets size of pick box in pixels BLIPMODE – Set to 1 marker blips show; set to 0 no blips CMDDIA – Set to 1 enables Plot dialogs, set to 0 disables Plot dialog DIM variables – There are between 50 and 60 variables for setting dimensioning, but most are in any case set in the Dimension Styles dialog or as dimensioning proceeds. However one series of the Dim variables may be of interest: DIMBLK – Sets a name for the block drawn for an operator’s own arrowheads. These are drawn in unit sizes and saved as required DIMBLK1 – Operator’s arrowhead for first end of line DIMBLK2 – Operator’s arrowhead for other end of line DRAGMODE – Set to 0 no dragging; set to 1 dragging on; set to 2 automatic dragging DRAGP1 – Sets regeneration drag sampling. Initial value is 10 DRAGP2 – Sets fast dragging regeneration rate. Initial value is 25 316

0750661763-App03 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 317

Some set variables

317

EDGEMODE – Controls the use of Trim and Extend. Set to 0 does not use extension mode; set to 1 uses extension mode FILEDIA – Set to 0 disables dialogs; set to 1 enables dialogs FILLMODE – Set to 0 entities created with Solid are not filled; set to 1 they are filled GRID – Allows setting of the grid dot spacing MBUTTONPAN – Set to 0 no right-click menu with the Intellimouse. Set to 1 Intellimouse right-click menu on MIRRTEXT – Set to 0 text direction is retained; set to 1 text is mirrored PELLIPSE – Set to 0 creates true ellipses; set to 1 polyline ellipses PICKADD – Set to 1 and objects can be selected one after the other when using tools such as Pedit (Multiple). When set to 0 only a single selection can be made PICKBOX – Sets selection pick box height in pixels PICKDRAG – Set to 0 selection windows picked by two corners; set to 1 selection windows are dragged from corner to corner QTEXTMODE – Set to 0 turns off Quick Text; set to 1 enables Quick Text SAVETIME – Sets Automatic Save time. Initially 120. Set to 0 disables Automatic Save time SHADEDGE – Set to 0 faces are shaded, edges are not highlighted; set to 1 faces are shaded, edges in colour of entity; set to 2 faces are not shaded, edges in entity colour; set to 3 faces in entity colour, edges in background colour SHORTCUTMENU – For controlling how right-click menus show: 0 all disabled; 1 Default menus only; 2 Edit mode menus; 4 Command mode menus; 8 Command mode menus only when options are currently available. Adding the figures enables more than one option SKETCHINC – Sets the Sketch record increment. Initial value is 0.1 SKPOLY – Set to 0 and Sketch makes line; set to 1 and Sketch makes polylines SNAP – Allows setting of the snap spacing SURFTAB1 – Sets mesh density in the M direction for surfaces generated by the Surfaces tools SURFTAB2 – Sets mesh density in the N direction for surfaces generated by the Surfaces tools TEXTFILL – Set to 0 True Type text shows as outlines only; set to 1 True Type text is filled TILEMODE – Set to 0 Paper space is enabled; set to 1 tiled viewports in Modelspace TOOLTIPS – Set to 0 no tool tips; set to 1 tool tips enabled TPSTATE – Set to 0 and the Tool Palette’s window is inactive. Set to 1 and the Tool Palette’s window is active TRIMMODE – Set to 0 edges not trimmed when Chamfer and Fillet are used; set to 1 edges are trimmed UCSFOLLOW – Set to 0 new UCS settings do not take effect; set to 1 UCS settings follow requested settings USCICON – Set 0FF and the UCS icon does not show; set to ON and it shows

0750661763-App04 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 318

APPENDIX D

Computing terms

This glossary contains some of the more common computing terms. Application – The name given to software packages which perform the tasks such as word processing, Desktop Packaging, CAD, etc. ASCII – The American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. A code which sets bits for characters used in computing. Attribute – Text appearing in a drawing, sometimes linked to a block. Autodesk – The American company which produces AutoCAD and other CAD software packages. Baud rate – A measure of the rate at which a computer system can receive information (measured in bits per second). BIOS – Basic Input–Output System. The chip in a PC that controls the operations performed by the hardware (e.g. disks, screen, keyboard, etc.). Bit – Short for binary digit. Binary is a form of mathematics that uses only two numbers: 0 and 1. Computers operate completely on binary mathematics. Block – A group of objects or entities on screen that have been linked together to act as one unit. Booting up – Starting up a computer to an operating level. Bus – An electronic channel that allows the movement of data around a computer. Byte – A sequence of 8 bits. C – A computer programming language. Cache – A section of memory (can be ROM or RAM) which holds data that is being frequently used. Speeds up the action of disks and applications. CAD – Computer-aided design. The term should not be used to mean computer aided drawing. CAD/CAM – Computer-aided design and manufacturing. CD-ROM – Computer disc read only memory. A disk system capable of storing several hundred MB of data – commonly 640 MB. Data can only be read from a CD-ROM, not written to it. Chips – Pieces of silicon (usually) that drive computers and into which electronic circuits are embedded. Command Line – In AutoCAD 2004, the Command Line is a window in which commands are entered from the keyboard and which contains the prompts and responses to commands. Clock speed – Usually measured in MHz (Megahertz) – this is the measure of the speed at which a computer processor works. 318

0750661763-App04 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 319

Computing terms 319

Clone – Refers to a PC that functions in a way identical to the original IBM PC. CMOS – Complimentary metal oxide semiconductor. Often found as battery-powered chips which control features such as the PC’s clockspeed. Communications – Describes the software and the hardware that allow computers to communicate. Compatibility – Generally used as a term for software or programs able to run on any computer that is an IBM clone. Coprocessor – A processor chip in a computer which runs in tandem with the main processor chip and can deal with arithmetic involving many decimal points (floating-point arithmetic). Often used in CAD systems to speed up drawing operations. CPU – Central processing unit. The chip that drives a PC. Data – Information that is created, used or stored on a computer in digital form. Database – A piece of software that can handle and organise large amounts of information. DesignXML – An Autodesk XML computer program for representing design data over the Internet. Dialogue box – A window that appears on screen in which options may be presented to the user, or requires the user to input information requested by the current application. Directories – The system in MS-DOS for organising files on disk. Could be compared with a folder (the directory) containing documents (the files). Disks – Storage hardware for holding data (files, applications, etc.). There are many types: the most common are hard disks (for mass storage), floppy disks (less storage) and CD-ROMs (mass storage). Display – The screen allowing an operator to see the results of his work at a computer. DOS – Disk operating system. The software that allows the computer to access and organise stored data. MS-DOS (produced by the Microsoft Corporation) is the DOS most widely used in PCs. DTP – Desktop publishing. DTP software allows for the combination of text and graphics into page layouts which may then be printed. Entity – A single feature in graphics being drawn on screen – a line, a circle, a point. Sometimes linked together in a block, when the block acts as an entity. EMS – Expanded memory specification. RAM over and above the original limit of 640 KB RAM in the original IBM PC. PCs are now being built to take up to 128 MB (or more) RAM. File – Collection of data held as an entity on a disk. Fixed disk – A hard disk that cannot usually be easily removed from the computer as distinct from floppy disks which are designed to be easily removable. Floppy disk – A removable disk that stores data in magnetic form. The actual disk is a thin circular sheet of plastic with a magnetic surface, hence the term ‘floppy’. It usually has a firm plastic case.

0750661763-App04 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 320

320

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

Flyout – A number of tool icons which appear when a tool icon which shows a small arrow is selected from a toolbar. Formatting – The process of preparing the magnetic surface of a disk to enable it to hold digital data. ftp – File Transfer Protocol. An Internet protocol used to fetch a required resource from the World-Wide Web (www) server. Giga – Means 1,000,000,000. In computer memory terms really 1000 MB – actually 1,073,741,824 bytes because there are 1024 bytes in 1 KB. GUI – Graphical user interface. Describes software (such as Windows) which allows the user to control the computer by representing functions with icons and other graphical images. Hardcopy – The result of printing (or plotting) text or graphics onto paper or card. Hard disk – A disk, usually fixed in a computer, which rotates at high speed and will hold large amounts of data often up to 1 GB. Hardware – The equipment used in computing: the computer itself, disks, printers, monitor, etc. HTML – HyperText Markup Language. A computer language for setting up pages which can be sent via the Internet. http – HyperText Transfer Protocol. An Internet protocol used to fetch a required resource from the worldwide web (www) server. Hz (hertz) – The measure of 1 cycle per second. In computing terms, often used in millions of hertz – (megahertz or MHz) as a measure of the clock speed. IBM – International Business Machines. An American computer manufacturing company – the largest in the world. Intel – An American company which manufactures the processing chips used in the majority of PCs. Internet – A network of computers linked in a worldwide system by telephone. Joystick – A small control unit used mainly in computer games. Some CAD systems use a joystick to control drawing on screen. Kilo – Means 1000. In computing terms 1 KB is 1024 bytes. LAN – Local area network. Describes a network that typically links PCs in an office by cable where distances between the PCs are small. LED – Light emitting diode. Library – A set of frequently used symbols, phrases or other data on disk, that can be easily accessed by the operator. Light pen – Used as a stylus to point directly at a display screen sensitive to its use. Memory – Any medium (such as RAM or ROM chips), that allows the computer to store data internally that can be instantly recalled. Message box – A window containing a message to be acted on which appears in response when certain tools or commands are selected. MHz – Megahertz – 1000000 hertz (cycles per second). Mouse – A device for controlling the position of an on-screen cursor within a GUI such as Windows.

0750661763-App04 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 321

Computing terms 321

Microcomputer – A PC is a microcomputer; a minicomputer is much larger and a mainframe computer which is larger still. With the increase in memory possible with a microcomputer, the term seems to be dropping out of use. Microsoft – The American company which produces Windows and MSDOS software. MIPS – Millions of instructions per second. A measure of a computer’s speed – it is not comparable with the clock speed as measured in MHz, because a single instruction may take more than a cycle to perform. Monitor – Display screen. MS-DOS – Microsoft Disk Operating System. Multitasking – A computer that can carry out more than one task at a time is said to be multitasking. For example in AutoCAD for Windows printing can be carried out ‘in the background’, while a new drawing is being constructed. Multi-user – A computer that may be used by more than one operator. Networking – The joining together of a group of computers allowing them to share the same data and software applications. LANs and WANs are examples of the types of networks available. Object – A term used in CAD to describe an entity or group of entities that have been linked together. Operating System – Software and in some cases hardware, that allow the user to operate applications software and organise and use data stored on a computer which allow the hardware of a computer to operate application software. PC – Personal computer. Should strictly only be used to refer to an IBM clone, but is now in general use. Pixels – The individual dots on a monitor display. Plotter – Produces hardcopy of, for instance, a drawing produced on a computer by moving a pen over a piece of paper or card. Printer – There are many types of printer: dot-matrix, bubble-jet and laser are the most common. Allows material produced on a computer (graphics and text) to be output as hardcopy. Processor – The operating chip of a PC. Usually a single chip, such as the Intel 80386, 80486 or Pentium chip. Program – A set of instructions to the computer that has been designed to produce a given result. RAM – Random access memory. Data stored in RAM is lost when the computer is switched off, unless previously saved to a disk. RGB – Red, green, blue. ROM – Read only memory. Refers to those chips from which the data stored can be read, but to which data cannot be written. The data on a ROM is not lost when a computer is switched off. Scanner – Hardware capable of being passed over a document or drawing and reading the image into a computer. Software – Refers to any program or application that is used and run on a computer.

0750661763-App04 1/12/04 5:24 PM Page 322

322

An Introduction to AutoCAD 2004: 2D and 3D Design

SQL – Structured query language. A computer programming language for translating and transferring data between an application such as AutoCAD and a database. Tools – Tools are usually selected from icons appearing in toolbars. A tool represents a command. Toolbar – Toolbars contain a number of icons, representing tools. Tooltip – When a tool is selected by a left-click on its icon, a small box appears (a Tool Tip) carrying the name of the tool. UNIX – A multiuser, multitasking operating system (short for UNICS: uniplexed information and computing systems). URL – Uniform Resource Locator. URL address – Has three parts: as an example, in the address http://www.autodesk.com/acaduser, http:// describes the service; www.autodesk.com is the Internet address; acaduser is the location at the Internet address. VDU – Visual display unit. Vectors – Refer to entities in computer graphics which are defined by the coordinates of end points of each part of the entity. VGA – Video graphics array. Screen displays with resolution of up to 640 480 pixels in 256 colours. SVGA (Super VGA) will allow resolutions up to 1024 768 pixels. Virtual memory – A system by which disk space is used as if it were RAM to allow the computer to function as if more physical RAM were present. It is used by AutoCAD (and other software), but can slow down a computer’s operation. WAN – Wide area network. A network of computers that are a large distance apart, often communicating by telephone. Warning box – A window containing a warning or request which the user must respond to, which appears when certain circumstances are met or actions are made. WIMP – Windows, icons, mice and pointers. A term used to describe some GUIs. Windows – An area of the computer screen within which applications such as word processors may be operated. Workstation – Often used to refer to a multiuser PC, or other system used for the purposes of CAD (or other applications). WORM – Write once read many. An optical data storage system that allows blank optical disks to have data written onto them only once. www – World Wide Web. WYSIWYG – What you see is what you get. What is seen on the screen is what will be printed.

0750661763-Index 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 323

Index

*.dwg file extension 13 2D Solid tool 263 3D Face – Invisible option 3D Face tool 263 3D mesh 263 3D solid models 198 3D Surfaces 263 3D Views 198 3point UCS 208

263

A printout 307 A3_template.dwt 5, 24 Absolute coordinates 36 Accurate drawing 36 Active Assistance dialog 11 Add-A-Plotter-Wizard 306 Aerial View window 21 Aligned Dimension tool 152 All zoom 18 Ambient light 249 Angular Dimension tool 154 Anti-aliasing 255 Array tool 74 Associative dimensioning 162 Associative hatching 143 Attribute Definition dialog 176 Attribute Edit dialog 176 Attributes 176 AutoCAD 2004 in designing 302 AutoCAD coordinate system 5 AutoCAD DesignCenter 114 AutoCAD message window 102 AutoCAD shortcut icon 3 AutoCAD SHX fonts 99 Autodesk Express Viewer 298 Autodesk Plotter Manager 306 Autodesk website 91 AutoSnap 44 Auxiliary views 125 Baseline Dimension tool 155 Bitmaps 174

Block Definition dialog 166 Blocks 165 Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog Box tool 200, 265 Break at Point tool 83 Break tool 83 Browsing the Web 299 Building drawing 183 Building plan drawings 183 Buzzsaw 91

138

Calling Help 11 Calling tools 5 Center zoom 18 Chamfer 231 Chamfer tool 85 Changing properties 119 Check Spelling dialog 101 Check Spelling tool 101 Circle tool 7, 9, 36 Click 1 Close button 4 Command line dimensioning 160 Command line hatching 146 Command window 4 Commands 5 Communication Center 305 Cone tool 205, 267 Construction drawings 183 Construction Line tool 55 Control Panel 306 Copy Link tool 190 Copy Object tool – Multiple response 71 Copy Object tool 70 Copy tool 190 Create Transmittal dialog 300 Crossing window 13 CtrlD key shortcut 41 Cursor hairs 4 Cursors 2 Cylinder tool 201 323

0750661763-Index 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 324

324

Index

Ddedit tool 100 Design 302 Design brief 303 Design Web Format files 298 DesignCenter – Tree View Toggle icon 117 DesignCenter 114 Dialog 2, 91 Diameter Dimension tool 153 Digitisers 1 Dimension abbreviations 161 Dimension Edit tool 159 Dimension Style 24, 27 Dimension Style Manager 151 Dimension Text tool 160 Dimension toolbar 151 Dimensioning 151 Dimensions Style Manager 27 Dish tool 268 Distant light 249 Docking 2 Dome tool 268 Double-click 1 Drafting Settings dialog 41 Drag 1 Drag and drop 2 Draw drop-down menu 10 Draw toolbar 3, 10, 51 Drawing Limits 24 Drawing security 296 Drawing Units dialog 25 Drawings from DesignCenter 115 Drop-down menus 3 DWF files 298 DXF files 190, 193 Dynamic Zoom 18 Edge Surface tool 270 Edit drop-down menu 190 Edit tools 190 Editing attributes 178 Elevation 60 Ellipse tool 8, 60 Emailing drawings 296 Encapsulated Postscript files 192 Engineering drawing hatching 147 Enhancements in AutoCAD 2004 304 Enter 3 Entity 3 EPS 190 Erase tool 12

eTransmit tool 300 Evaluation of a design 304 Explode 171 Explode tool 70 Export Data dialog 192 Express tools 111, 299 Extend tool 82 Extents zoom 19 External references 172 Extrude – Path option 221 Extrude tool 215 F1 function key 11 F10 function key 11, 45 F3 function key 11, 44 F6 function key 6 F7 function key 11, 46 F8 function key 46 F9 function key 11 Fillet tool 86, 216 First angle projection 123 Floor layout drawings 183 Floppy disk 13 Flyout 3 Format drop-down menu 24 Geometric Tolerance 158 Geometrical tolerance tool 157 Gradient colour 141 Grid 24 to 26 Grid dots 4 Grips 111 Hand drawing 302 Hard disk 305 Hatch palettes 138 Hatch Preview 143 Hatch tool 138 Hatching 138 Hatching building drawings 184 Hatching engineering drawings 147 Hatching from command line 146 Help drop-down menu 11 Hide tool 204 HTM file 305 Icons 3 Image tool 172 Insert Block tool 167 Insert Block tool icon flyout 172 Inserting blocks 171 Inserting raster images 174

0750661763-Index 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 325

Index

Inserts 165 Internet tools 296 Inverse Linear lighting 250 Inverse Square lighting 250 Isocircles 128 Isolines 201 Isolines variable 201 Isometric projection 127 Isoplanes 128 Layer colour 30 Layer icons 32, 106 Layer Properties Manager 30 Layers 30, 105, 254 Layers toolbar 3 Layout tab 227 Layout tabs 4 Left-click 1 Light attenuation 250 Light intensity 250 Lighting colour 250 Lighting icons 251 Lights dialog 249 Limits 24 Line tool 7, 9 Linear Dimension tool 151 Linear tolerances 158 Lines in technical drawings 126 Linetypes 30 Lineweights 108 Make Block tool 165 Material tool 254 Material when rendering 253 Materials Library tool 253 Maximise button 4 MDE 118 Menu bar 4 Menus 91 Microsoft Word 191 Minimise button 4 Mirror tool 72 Mirrtext variable 73 Model Space 34 Model tab 4 Models in designing 303 Modify drop-down menu 109 Modify II toolbar 179 Modify toolbar 3, 70 Monitor screen 305 Mouse 1 Mouse wheel 22

325

Move tool 77 Multiline Text 97 Multiple Document Environment 118 Never draw the same feature twice 302 New Point Light dialog 249 Object Linking and Embedding Object Snaps 41 Objects 3 Offset tool 73 OLE Properties dialog 191 Online Resources 299 Opening AutoCAD 3 Operating system 305 Optical mouse 1 Options dialog 91, 107 Ordinate Dimension tool 152 Ortho 46 Ortho button 10 Orthographic projection 123 Osnap abbreviations 43 Osnmap button 41

193

Palettes 304 Pan tool 22 Pantone colour 305 Paper Space 33 Paper Space window 227 Passwords 296 Paste tool 191 Pellipse variable 62 Photo Raytrace rendering 247 Photo Real rendering 247 Pick 2 Pick box 3 Pick box size 109 Plot dialogs 306 Plot Preview 109, 309 Plot tool 307 Point light 249 Point tool 64 Polar Array 75 Polar button 45 Polar tracking 45 Polygon tool 57 Polygons 58 Polyline Edit – Multiple option 110 Polyline Edit tool 109 Polyline tool 51

0750661763-Index 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 326

326

Index

Previous zoom 19 Printing and plotting 306 Properties palette 118 Publish 305 Publish to Web dialogs 296 Pyramid tool 266 Quick Dimension too 154 Quick Leader tool 156 Radius Dimension tool 153 RAM 305 Raster files 174 Realisation of designs 304 Realtime zoom 18 Reasons for using AutoCAD 302 Rectangle tool 59 Rectangular Array 74 Redo tool 13 Regen tool 13 Relative coordinates 39 Render toolbar 248 Render tools 248 Rendering 247 Rendering backgrounds 256 Rendering lighting 248 Rendering options 247 Research 303 Return key 3 Revcloud tool 62 Revolve tool 222 Revolved Surface tool 271 Right-click menus 93 Rotate tool 78 Rubber band 41 Ruled Surface tool 272 Save Drawing As dialog 13 Saving drawings 13 Saving templates 32 Scale tool 79 Scale zoom 19 Screen colours 107 Search the Web icon 91 Section hatching 146 Section tool 226 Security of drawings 296 Security Options dialog 296 Select 3 Select Image File dialog 174 Setup Profile tool 227 Shadows 250

Shadows in renderings 254 Shortcutmenu variable 97 Single Line Text 98 Site layout drawings 183 Slice tool 225 Snap 24, 46 Snap button 6, 10 Solids toolbar 200 Solids tools 198 Solutions of designs 303 Solving a brief 303 Spelling checking 99 Sphere tool 206, 267 Spline tool 63 Spotlight 249 Standard toolbar 3 Start button 14 Status bar 4 Stretch tool 79 Styles toolbar 3 Sub-menus 93 Subtract tool 202 Surface M and N densities 263 Surfaces toolbar 263 Surftab variables 267 Symbols in geometric tolerances 158 Symbols saved in the DesignCenter 167 System requirements for AutoCAD 2004 305 Tab key 3 Tabulated Surface tool 271 Technical drawings 302 Templates 5, 24 Terms used in this book 2 Text 97 Text fonts 99 Text Formatting dialog 97 Text Style 24 Text Style dialog 26, 97 Text symbols 102 Textfill variable 102 Thickness 60 Third angle projection 123 Title bar 4 Toggling coordinates 6 Toggling Grid 11 Toggling Ortho 11 Toggling Osnap 11 Toggling Polar 11 Toggling Snap 11

0750661763-Index 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 327

Index

Tool 3 Tool tip 3 Torus tool 269 Tracing paper 106 Tracking 41 Trim tool 80 Ttr response 36 Types of building drawings 183 Types of technical drawings 123 UCS 199, 206 UCS icon 4, 207 Ucsfollow variable 238 Ucsvp variable 238 Undo tool 13 Union tool 201 Units 24 Variety of Zooms 18 View drop-down menu 198, 237 Viewports 237 Viewports dialog 238 Views in orthographic projection 124

Warning windows 92 Wblocks 169 Web page 296 Web toolbar 299 Wedge tool 204, 266 Window zoom 19 Windowing 13 Windows Start button 14 Windows True Type fonts 99 Written blocks 169 X coordinate 5 Xrefs 172 Y coordinate 5 Z coordinate 198 Z coordinate 6 Zoom in 22 Zoom out 22 Zoom toolbar 17 Zoom tools 17

327

0750661763-Index 1/12/04 4:59 PM Page 328